OS/2 Shareware BBS: 10 Tools/10-Tools.zip/pdlite.zip/Designer.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1995-07-11 | 331KB | 12,259 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Prominare Designer Update ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

                                   Welcome to
                               Prominare Designer
                                    Release 4

Please read the information provided within this window so you will become
instantly familiar with the new features and enhancements of Prominare Designer
Release 4.

This version of Prominare Designer has been enhanced to with a cleaner
interface by changing the fonts from the default system font to 8 point Helv.
This makes the dialogues more compact and easier to look at.

The mouse usage is no user definable.  You can now specify which mouse/key
combinations should be used for the various selection operations.

The ID List dialogue is no longer used.  In its place is a new control that
combines the symbol and ID value.  The entry areas allow for the entering of
the symbol and value.  A drop-down button allows you to select the previously
defined items.

The Tool Bar buttons will now display small baloon help items when the mouse
pointer pauses overtop.

To move the selected group of controls, you press the Alt key and then button 1
of the mouse keeping the mouse button depressed.  While you move the mouse
around, the tracking frame will be displayed showing the relative position the
group would have if it is moved.  The x and y positions within the status
window at the bottom of the Prominare Designer window will show the absolute
position.

The following sub-menu has been added as the File Print menu:

      All...
      Displayed...

 The following menu has been added as the Configure menu:

      Creation options...
      CUA compliance...
      Default usage...
      .DFM registration...
      Custom controls...

 The following menu has been added as the Find menu:

      Search...
      Search next

 The following menu items have been added to the Rules Source menu:

      XxxxRegister...
      XxxxQuery...
      XxxxStyles...
      XxxxWndProc...

 The following menu items have been added to the Rules Layout menu:

      PMCX window...
      PMCX dialogue...

 The following menu items have been added to the Options menu:

 The former menu items for File Defaults have been placed within the Configure
 in the Defaults sub-menu of the File menu.

 The dialogue display units have been revised to be more accurate.

 It is now possible to cut and paste controls.  You first need to select a
 group of controls and then use the normal cut and paste methods.

 OS/2 and Microsoft Windows script files can now be imported into the design
 you are working on.

 Each of the dialogues now contains a unique ID button.

 A new tools window has been added that allows you to update the control text,
 ID symbol and value without having to display the control's styles dialogue.

 When you want to create a PMCX control, you can now have Prominare Designer
 generate the source code for the control.  Also, you can now have Prominare
 Designer update your .IPF files to include any new help panels that you have
 defined.

 The tool bar has been expanded to include many repetitive use items such as
 cut, copy, paste, as well as have other functions such as font and colours,
 save, added.

 Also, Prominare Designer allows you to add design notes to the design file and
 the individual dialogues or windows.

 Within the alignment options, an autosizing option has been added that will
 size the displayed rectangle of button and text controls to the exact text
 displayed.

 The print facility now prints out more detail.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Prominare Designer Introduction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

                                   Welcome to
                               Prominare Designer
                                    Release 4

Please read the information provided within this window so you will become
instantly familiar with the basic operation of Prominare Designer Release 4.

Mouse Operation

Mouse operation within Prominare Designer is quite straight forward and easy to
use.  Double clicking the mouse pointer on a control within the window or
dialogue you are designing will cause the appropriate styles dialogue to be
displayed.  Clicking the mouse pointer using button 2 on a control will cause
the selection frame to be displayed or removed from that control.

To move a control, click the mouse pointer on the control and keep button 1 of
the mouse pressed.  While the mouse button is pressed, you can then move the
mouse around within the window or dialogue with the tracking frame being
displayed showing the relative placement of the control selected.  When you
release the mouse button, the control will be moved to that location.  While
performing this operation, the x and y position of the lower left corner of the
control will be displayed within the status window in the bottom right corner
of the Prominare Designer window.

To select individual controls for a group, you only need to press the Ctrl key
and button 1 of the mouse.  When you do this, the control that you have clicked
the mouse pointer on will be added to the group of controls selected if an
existing group is present, or a new group will be started.  Also, if you click
the mouse pointer within the dialogue area and not over a control keeping both
the Ctrl key and button 1 of the mouse pressed and drag the mouse pointer over
controls, you will notice a rubber band selector being displayed thereby
allowing you to quickly select controls for a group.  After you release the
mouse button, the controls falling within the rubber band will form the group.
You can then add or remove controls from the group using the Ctrl key, button 1
combination.

To move the selected group of controls, you press the Alt key and then button 1
of the mouse keeping the mouse button depressed.  While you move the mouse
around, the tracking frame will be displayed showing the relative position the
group would have if it is moved.  The x and y positions within the status
window at the bottom of the Prominare Designer window will show the absolute
position.

You can through the Mouse notebook page configure how the mouse is used.

Control colours

Within the styles dialogues, control styles specific to OS/2 2.x are shown in
bright red.  This will allow you to distinguish between control styles that are
available both for OS/2 1.x and 2.x and those that are for OS/2 2.x only.

Colours that are common between OS/2 and Windows are shown in black.  Style
options shown in dark red are specific to that given environment. If the style
option is in bright red, it is specific to OS/2 2.x.

Symbol/ID colours

The Symbol/ID drop-down displays the symbols in different colours.  The colours
are used to denote predefined OS/2 symbols, new symbols added to the design,
symbols used within the design and symbols not used within the design.

Menu lists symbol colours

For the menu lists, action bar menu items and sub-menus are displayed in
colours to allow you to quickly distinguish each type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. About the Prominare Designer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Prominare Designer is a Presentation Manager based application for
designing Presentation Manager applications. It is used to create an
applications window including menus and dialogues.

The help facility is designed to give a context-sensitive description of the
dialogue or window you invoked help from.  It is not intended to be a tutorial.

For more information about using the help facility, select Help for help on the
Help pull-down.

Windows and dialogues created through Prominare Designer are stored in in
script format (.RC) or in binary format (.RES) and internal format (.PDF).  You
use the Resource Compiler to compile the resource script (.RC file) to be able
to attach to the final executable version of the program.

Along with the above files, Prominare Designer can also generate the necessary
source code that controls each window and dialogue created.

Prominare Designer will correctly insert new source code for windows, dialogues
and certain controls when you add them through the program without corrupting
the source code you have created.

Prominare Designer will automatically assign an integer value to each item you
create.  You can replace the default value with a symbolic value and integer.
These values are placed in an include (.H) file. Prominare Designer can read
and save to include files that contain comments.

The main window area of Prominare Designer is the editing area.  A window or
dialogue you are designing will be displayed in that area.  You can select a
window, dialogue or control by clicking the mouse pointer on it.  Using button
1 on the mouse allows you to adjust the item.  Button 2 allows you to select it
to view the control information and to edit the styles as necessary. In either
case, a frame is displayed around the selected item with the mouse pointer
changing to a cross when it is over the item.

At the bottom of the Prominare Designer window is a window containing status
information.  Within this window, information will be displayed stating the
current operation, the x and y points and width and height of the selected
item.  The relative position of the item is shown along with the type of item
selected and its symbolic value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Prominare Designer Startup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you first start Prominare Designer, you will be presented with the
Prominare Designer Startup dialogue.  This dialogue allows you to select the
initial actions that will be performed.  These include starting a new design
through the New Design dialogue.  The second option allows you to open an
existing design through the Open dialogue.  The third options allows you to
import a binary or script resource file (or extract the binary resources from
an executable or DLL) through the Import dialogue.  Finally, you can select
from a list of the last opened files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Help for Prominare Designer Startup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Prominare Designer Startup allows you to select the initial actions that will
be performed.  These include starting a new design through the New Design
dialogue.  The second option allows you to open an existing design through the
Open dialogue.  The third options allows you to import a binary or script
resource file (or extract the binary resources from an executable or DLL)
through the Import dialogue.  Finally, you can select from a list of the last
opened files.

Clicking the mouse pointer on the Start push button causes the selected action
to be performed.  Clicking the mouse pointer on the Cancel push button causes
no actions to be performed and hides the dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Help for Tool Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Tool Bar contains various button selections that allow you to easily
configure Prominare Designer or select options.

You select windows or dialogues you wish to work on through the combo-box
labeled Windows/Dialogues.  When you select the window or dialogue to work on,
it will be displayed.

To the right of the combo-box are tool bar buttons.  Each of the buttons allows
you to quickly configure Prominare Designer.

The first button of the first row:

is used start a new design.

The next button:

is used to open an existing design file.

The next button:

is used to save the design file along with the resource file and source code
files.

The next button:

is used to print the currently displayed window, dialogue or popup menu.

The next button:

is used to search the design for a specified text string, ID symbol or value.

The second of the search buttons:

is used to turn on or off the duplicate ID scanning function that is
automatically performed when you save a design.  This function checks for
duplicate ID's that will cause an error either in the resource compile of the
resource script file or in the resource binding.  A duplicate ID is considered
only on a high-level basis like menu's, dialogues, tables, resources, etc.

The first clipboard button:

is used to cut the window, dialogue or selected controls from the design and
place them on the clipboard.

The second clipboard button:

is used to copy the window, dialogue or selected controls from the design and
place them on the clipboard.

The last clipboard button:

is used to paste the window, dialogue or selected controls into the design from
the clipboard.

The next button:

is used to define the resource distribution.

The next button:

is used to enter or edit design notes for the displayed window or dialogue.

The next button:

is used to define the messages that are to be handled by the displayed window
or dialogue.

The next button:

is used to create a new window or dialogue.

The first of the group oriented buttons:

is used as the alignment mode button.  By selecting the button, you cause
Prominare Designer to display the Align Group. dialogue to be displayed.  It
will allow you to apply the final alignment to the group of controls selected.

The second group oriented button is:

which is used as the replace mode button.  By selecting the button, you cause
Prominare Designer to display the Replace Controls. dialogue to be displayed.
It will allow you to replace the selected controls with another control type or
style.

The duplicate tool bar button is:

and can be used to set Prominare Designer into duplicate control mode.  When
you select the button, each time you select a control within the window or
dialogue, the control will be duplicated.  This mode will be retained until you
turn it off by selecting the button a second time.

The mouse align tool bar button is:

is used to set the offset position from which the dialogue is to be placed when
the dialogues positioning is relative the mouse.  Selecting the tool bar button
causes the mouse pointer to change into the offset selection pointer which is
then positioned in the location where the mouse pointer should appear when the
dialogue is displayed.  The position indicators in the status window will
display the current location of the lower left corner of the dialogue in
relation to the mouse.  Once you have clicked the mouse pointer at the location
where you want the mouse pointer to be displayed when the dialogue is
displayed, the Relative Mouse Position dialogue will be displayed showing the
offset position of the lower left of the dialogue.  You can enter different
values in place of those displayed.

You can cause the same dialogue to be displayed by double clicking button 2
with the mouse pointer on the tool bar button.  This will allow you to manually
enter the value of the offset.

It should be noted that the tool bar button can only be selected when you set
the Relative option within the Window/Dialogues Styles dialogue to Mouse.

Beside the relative mouse position button is:

The set focus button is used to set the control that is to receive the initial
focus when the dialogue is first displayed.  When you select the button, you
move the mouse pointer over the controls within the dialogue. As the pointer
moves over the controls, it will change shape from an arrow to a four headed
arrow or to a circle with a slash in it.  When the pointer is the four headed
arrow, it signifies that the control can be selected as the initial focus
control.  Conversely, when the mouse pointer is a circle with a slash through
it, the control can not be selected to receive the initial focus.  The tool bar
button will return to its original shape when you have selected the required
control.

Beside the set focus button is:

The arrange controls button is used to arrange the display order of controls
within a window or dialogue.

A dialogue will be displayed with a list of all the controls in the window or
dialogue.  You can then select a control and move its relative display order to
another position.

You can also set groups and tab stops within the dialogue.

The first of the last set of buttons on the first row:

is used to display the template of the VGA display within the Prominare
Designer window when you are working on a high resolution type monitor.  This
button is only selectable when working on a screen that is in a display mode
higher than 640 x 480 (VGA).  It will show the relative sizes of a VGA screen
thereby allowing you to check you dialogue sizes against the template size.

The next button:

is used to display the Tools window.  Selecting the tool bar button causes the
Tools window to be displayed.  Selecting it when it is in the down position
will cause the Tools window to be hidden.

The last tool bar button:

is used to cause Prominare Designer to record the location of itself such that
when you exit Prominare Designer, the size and location are noted such that
when you start Prominare Designer the next time, it will be displayed in the
same location and size.

The first button of the second row beside the Window/Dialogue drop-down:

is used as the test button.  By selecting the button, you cause Prominare
Designer to switch from design mode to testing mode.  You can then test you
window or dialogue.  To return back from test mode to design mode, you select
the button again.

Beside the test button is:

The presentation parameters button is used to set or remove the font and
colours of the control or the group of controls that you have selected within
the window or dialogue.  When selected, it causes the Font & Colour dialogue to
be displayed.  It will allow you to set the colours and fonts for the selected
controls.

Beside the presentation parameters button is:

The font button is used to set or remove the font the control or group of
controls that you have selected within the window or dialogue.  When selected,
it causes the Font dialogue to be displayed.  It will allow you to set the
fonts for the selected controls.

Beside the font button is:

The pen options allow you to set the various pen oriented options for the
selected controls that are pen centric.

Beside the pen button is:

The bidirection options allow you to set the various bidirectional options for
the selected controls.

The control limits tool bar button is:

and can be used to determine the limits of a particular display device with
respect to the controls within a window or dialogue.  Using the device
definitions entered through the Display Units dialogue, you can see if the
current control size is adequate for a given display device.  For example, if
you are using a display with a resolution of 1024 x 768, you may find that the
controls that you have set up in a dialogue appear clipped within the dialogue
when it is displayed on a system that is 640 x 480 in resolution.  When you
have selected the target device and select the Display Limits tool bar button,
a rectangle will appear around each control showing the limits that would apply
if the control was displayed on the target device selected.

To pick the target display, double click button 2 of the mouse on the button
which will cause the Display Limits dialogue to be displayed where you can
select the target device to test the limits against.

The show ID's tool bar button is:

is used to display the numeric values of each of the controls within the window
or dialogue.  The numeric values will be shown in red against a white
background within each control.

The first of the final tool bar buttons:

is used to display the positioning grid.  Selecting the tool bar button causes
the grid to be displayed within the window or dialogues that you are designing.
It also causes the placement of controls adhere to the grid if requested.
Selecting it when it is in the down position will cause the grid to be removed.
Double clicking button 2 of the mouse while the pointer is over the tool bar
button will cause the Grid Dialogue dialogue to be displayed which will allow
you to enter the size of the grid to use.

The final tool bar button:

is used to cause Prominare Designer to generate the source code for the
application you are designing without saving the design file and the resource
files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Help for Test ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The  tool bar button is used to start and end the testing of a window or
dialogue.

When the button is in the up position, it denotes that you are in design mode
where you can add and remove elements from the window or dialogue you are
currently editing.  These elements include controls, menus, sub-menus, etc.

When you click the mouse pointer on the test button, you change from design
mode to test mode.  Once in test mode, you cannot add or delete design
elements.

The testing of the window or dialogue will allow you to see how your window or
dialogue feels and also test the linkages between it and other dialogues.

When you click the mouse pointer on the button a second time, you will be
placed back into design mode from test mode where you can continue to add or
remove design elements.

You can also enter or exit test mode by pressing Ctrl+T on the keyboard. The
window or dialogue that you are designing will be placed into or removed from
test mode.  Any dialogue links that are active during the testing of the window
or dialogue will be destroyed and you will be returned to design mode of the
starting window or dialogue.

Note:  If you have designed a dialogue that is linked to a menu or push button
       and you have invoked that dialogue during the testing AND that dialogue
       does not possess a system menu or push button with an ID value of DID_OK
       or DID_CANCEL, you can cause the dialogue to be dismissed by pressing
       the Esc key on the keyboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Help for Alignment Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Alignment dialogue is used to select the alignment type for the controls
selected for aligning.

You can align the selected controls either horizontally or vertically, with
equal spacing, same size and push button alignment.

The notebook within the dialogue provides the four different alignment types:

      Alignment
      Spacing
      Size
      Push buttons

 The order that the alignment progresses is:

   1. Auto-sizing
   2. Push buttons
   3. Alignment
   4. Size
   5. Spacing

 The Align push button is used to align the controls selected, whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to cancel the alignment process.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Help for Alignment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Alignment dialogue is used to select the alignment type for the controls
selected for aligning.

You can align the selected controls either horizontally or vertically, with
equal spacing, same size and push button alignment.

The notebook within the dialogue provides the four different alignment types:

      Alignment
      Spacing
      Size
      Push buttons

 The order that the alignment progresses is:

   1. Auto-sizing
   2. Push buttons
   3. Alignment
   4. Size
   5. Spacing

 The Align push button is used to align the controls selected, whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to cancel the alignment process.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Help for Font & Colours ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For certain types of controls within a dialogue, you can define additional font
and colours.

The dialogue allows you to define the colours for the following areas of a
control:

     Foreground
     Background
     Highlight Foreground
     Highlight Background
     Disabled Foreground
     Disabled Background
     Border
     Active colour (2.x only)
     Inactive colour (2.x only)
     Active text foreground (2.x only)
     Active text background (2.x only)
     Inactive text foreground (2.x only)
     Inactive text background (2.x only)
     Shadow (2.x only)

 For certain types of controls within a dialogue, you can define additional
 font and font size.  All fonts that are available on your system will be
 selectable through the drop-down list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Help for Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For certain types of controls within a dialogue, you can define additional font
and font size.  All fonts that are available on your system will be selectable
through the drop-down list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Help for Set Initial Focus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can change the default initial focus within a dialogue by using the Set
focus tool bar button on the Tool Bar.

OS/2 Presentation Manager will set the default focus within a dialogue to the
first tab-stop item within the dialogue.  It also allows you to set the focus
to another control by setting the focus to another control and to inform it of
doing so.

This allows you to designate the control that you want to have the focus when
the dialogue is created.  After you have selected the the tool bar button, the
mouse pointer will change to a four arrow headed selection shape or a circle
with a slash through it depending on where you move the pointer.

When the pointer is the four arrow headed shape, this indicates that the
control could have the initial focus whereas when it is the circle with a
slash, the control cannot have the focus.

Once you click button 1 of the mouse on the control that is to receive the
focus, Prominare Designer will record the control selected and will generate
the appropriate code in the WM_INITDLG message handling within the dialogue
procedure.  Within the status window, the ID value for the control that is to
receive the initial focus will be shown.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Help for Replace Controls Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Replace Controls dialogue is used to select the replacement control type
for the controls selected.

The selected controls will have there type changed to the new type selected
from the type shown in the dialogue.  You can select from the following types:



      Pushbutton


      Check box


      Radio button


      Horizontal scroll bar


      Vertical scroll bar


      List box


      Entry field


      Groupbox


      Static text


      Frame


      Rectangle


      Icon


      Bitmap


      System icon


      Combination box


      Multiple-line entry field


      Spin button


      Container


      Slider


      Value set


      Notebook


      User defined


      Circular slider


      Graphic button


      Handwriting


      Sketch


      Child window

 When the control type selected is User defined, the User Define. dialogue will
 be displayed allowing you to select the actual user defined or custom control
 to use as the replacement type.

 The Replace push button is used to replace the controls selected, whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to cancel the replacement process.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Help for Replace Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Replace Controls dialogue is used to select the replacement control type
for the controls selected.

The selected controls will have there type changed to the new type selected
from the type shown in the dialogue.  You can select from the following types:



      Pushbutton


      Check box


      Radio button


      Horizontal scroll bar


      Vertical scroll bar


      List box


      Entry field


      Groupbox


      Static text


      Frame


      Rectangle


      Icon


      Bitmap


      System icon


      Combination box


      Multiple-line entry field


      Spin button


      Container


      Slider


      Value set


      Notebook


      User defined


      Circular slider


      Graphic button


      Handwriting


      Sketch


      Child window

 When the control type selected is User defined, the User Define. dialogue will
 be displayed allowing you to select the actual user defined or custom control
 to use as the replacement type.

 The Replace push button is used to replace the controls selected, whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to cancel the replacement process.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Help for Duplicate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To aid the creating of similar controls within the current window or dialogue,
select the Duplicate tool bar button on the Tool Bar.

When you select a control, the control you have selected will be duplicated but
with a new ID value.

If you keep the left mouse button down while selecting the control you wish to
duplicate, the move frame around the duplicated control will be displayed
allowing you to move the duplicated control to the final position you wish to
place it.

Once you release the left mouse button, the appropriate dialogue for the type
of control you selected will be displayed allowing you to update the styles,
text and ID values of the control.

You can then select another control to duplicate or you can turn off the
control duplicate by selecting the Duplicate from the Edit pull-down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Help for Display Limits Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Units dialogue allows you to select display conversions to use when
you select the Display limits tool bar button.  Using these conversions,
Prominare Designer can display the rectangles that a given device would
translate to for the controls within the window or dialogue.  This allows you
to effectively check the controls within a window or dialogue for errant
display clipping without having to display the window or dialogue on a display
of a given type and resolution.

You may have noticed that if you have designed a dialogue using a device with a
1024 x 768 resolution, that when you have run the final application on a system
only having a 640 x 480 resolution, that some of the controls have been clipped
such that not all of the information for the control is displayed.

Prominare Designer uses these conversion factors to convert the dialogue units
of the control being displayed to the pixel count of such that the rectangle
would be shown relative to the current control.

To select an entry, you first select the entry within the Device drop down list
and then select the Set push button.

To ignore the values selected, click the mouse pointer on the Cancel push
button.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Help for Relative Mouse Position Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Relative Mouse Position dialogue is used to specify the relative position
of the lower left corner of the dialogue you are designing relative the
position of the mouse pointer when the dialogue is first displayed.

You enter the x and y offsets in the entry fields found within the dialogue.
These offsets are defined as being the distance the left corner should be
relative to the current mouse location.

For example, if you wanted the mouse pointer to be located in the dialogue at
postion 5, 5, then the lower left corner of the dialogue relative to this
position would be -5, -5 and you would enter -5 in the x offset entry field and
the same value within the y offset entry field.

The Set push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Help for Relative Mouse Position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Relative Mouse Position dialogue is used to specify the relative position
of the lower left corner of the dialogue you are designing relative the
position of the mouse pointer when the dialogue is first displayed.

You enter the x and y offsets in the entry fields found within the dialogue.
These offsets are defined as being the distance the left corner should be
relative to the current mouse location.

For example, if you wanted the mouse pointer to be located in the dialogue at
postion 5, 5, then the lower left corner of the dialogue relative to this
position would be -5, -5 and you would enter -5 in the x offset entry field and
the same value within the y offset entry field.

The Set push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. Help for Show ID's ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Show ID's tool bar button is used to toggle the display of the control ID's
within each of the controls.  When the button is down, the numeric ID values
for each of the controls will be displayed in red against a white background
centred within each control contained in the window or dialogue.

When the button is in the up position, the controls will be displayed in the
normal fashion.  In this case, the method of determining the control ID is to
click either button 1 or button 2 of the mouse and to view the control symbolic
ID within the status window at the bottom of the Prominare Designer window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. Help for Grid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change control alignment grid, double click the Grid Tool Bar button on the
Tool Bar.

To display the grid, click the button.

Note:  Small grid values will cause displaying of window or dialogue designs to
       be extremely slow and therefore should be used only as required.

 The default grid is 1 on the x axis and 1 on the y axis.  If you want the
 controls you create and move to be aligned on a different a specific increment
 in either the x or y direction, you can use the grid function to do this.

 The Grid dialogue allows you to change the control movement increments.

 You can enter the new x and y increments in the entry fields provided within
 the dialogue.

 The Set push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the grid increments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. Help for Grid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change control alignment grid, double click the Grid tool bar button on the
Tool Bar.

To display the grid, click the button.

Note:  Small grid values will cause displaying of window or dialogue designs to
       be extremely slow and therefore should be used only as required.

 The default grid is 1 on the x axis and 1 on the y axis.  If you want the
 controls you create and move to be aligned on a different a specific increment
 in either the x or y direction, you can use the grid function to do this.

 The Grid dialogue allows you to change the control movement increments.

 You can enter the new x and y increments in the entry fields provided within
 the dialogue.

 The Set push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the grid increments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. Help for Scan Errors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To check your design for errors either during the save process you need to
select the Scan errors tool bar button.  When the button is depressed, the
design will be scanned for duplicate ID's on at a level that would cause a
resource compiler error or prevent the .RES file created from being bound to
the executable or DLL. It will also scan the design for specified resource
files like icon and bitmap files to ensure that they exist and can be added to
the resource information.

Alternately, double clicking button 2 of the mouse on the Scan errors tool bar
button will cause the design to be immediately checked for errors.

If any errors are detected, the Design Errors dialogue will be displayed
listing errors detected.  Through the dialogue, you will be able to see each
error found within your design and be able to correct the errors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. Help for Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The  is used to display the templates of the common displays within the
Prominare Designer window when you are working on a high resolution type
monitor.  This button is only selectable when working on a screen that is in a
display mode higher than 640 x 480 (VGA).  It will show the relative sizes of a
VGA screen thereby allowing you to check you dialogue sizes against the
template size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. Help for Controls Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use the controls window to quickly select controls that you wish to add
to a window or dialogue design.  By clicking the mouse pointer on the desired
image, Prominare Designer will change the mouse cursor from an arrow to a cross
hair shape to allow you to select the location where the control is to be
placed within the window or dialogue.

The tools window is faster than using the Control pull down menu and you can
use either.

The following explains what each of the representations within the window are:

      Push Button
      Creates a push button.

      Check Box
      Creates a check box.

      Radio Button
      Creates a radio button.

      Horz. Scroll
      Creates a horizontal scroll bar.

      Vert. Scroll
      Creates a vertical scroll bar.

      List Box
      Creates a list box.

      Ettry Field
      Creates an entry field.

      Group Box
      Creates a group box.

      Text
      Creates text.

      Icon
      Creates a static icon.

      Bitmap
      Creates a static bitmap.

      Combo Box
      Creates a combo box.

      Multi-Line
      Creates a multi-line entry field.

      Spin button  (OS/2 1.3 and above)
      Creates a spin button.

      Slider  (2.x only)
      Creates a slider.

      Value set (2.x only)
      Creates a value set.

      Notebook (2.x only)
      Creates a notebook.

      User defined
      Allows selection and creation of a user defined custom control.

      Circular slider (MMPM/2 only)
      Creates a circular slider.

      Graphic button (MMPM/2 only)
      Creates a graphic button.

      Handwriting control (Pen for OS/2 only)
      Creates a handwriting control.

      Sketch control (Pen for OS/2 only)
      Creates a sketch control.

      Action bar menu
      Creates an action bar menu.

      Sub-menu item
      Creates a sub-menu item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. Help for Save Window Position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save window position tool bar button to save the current position of the
Prominare Designer window so that the next time you use the program, the window
will be displayed in the current position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. Help for Group Move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you select a control by clicking the left mouse button while pressing the
Ctrl key at the same time, a frame will be displayed around along with a larger
outer frame.  This outer frame will expand and contract depending on the number
of controls selected and de-selected.  Selected controls will always have the
frame displayed around them.

Once you have selected all of the controls you wish to move as a group, you can
move the group by selecting a control within the group while pressing the Alt
key at the same.  Keeping the both the Alt key and the left mouse button
pressed, you can move the group to the location desired.

Once you release the left mouse button, the move frame will disappear along
with the group frame and the frames around the selected controls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. Help for Grid Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Grid dialogue allows you to change the control movement increments.

You can enter the new x and y increments in the entry fields provided within
the dialogue.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
and to not change the grid increments.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. Help for Code Generator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you select the Code Generator tool bar button on the Tool Bar the source
code for the application you are designing will be generated.  This will only
be possible when you allow the source code to be generated.

The design file and the resource files (either script or binary) will not be
saved.

This is a quick way of updating the source code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. Help for Bidirectional Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The bidirectional Support is used to change the bidirection characteristics of
controls within the dialogue or window you are currently designing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. Help for Pen Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The pen options allows you to set various pen options for controls that support
pen data.  These controls are:

      Entry field
      Multiple-line entry field
      Combo-box
      Spin button
      Handwriting control

 Note:  For the options to be available to you, you must be running Pen for
        OS/2 Version 1.1 or higher.

 You can set options for the following:

      Layouts/Resource
      Options
      Layouts/Resource
      Symbol Sets
      Include/Exclude Regions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for File pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File pull-down contains commands that let you open and save files,
configure Prominare Designer and to exit.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the File pull-down.

The menu items contained within the File pull-down are:

      New design
      Creates new design and header files.

      Open
      Opens a design file.

      Import
      Imports an existing .RES file, .RC (both OS/2 and Microsoft Windows) file
      or to extract the resources from a .DLL or .EXE file.

      Merge
      Merges an existing design file with the current design.

      Include new
      Creates a new header file.

      Include open
      Opens a header file.

      Save
      Saves the current desgin under current name.

      Save as
      Saves current design under a new name.

      Quick save
      Saves current design file without saving resource or source code files.
      Refresh .RES
      Refreshes resource files (.RES) for revised bitmap, icon, pointer and
      other external resource information.

      Include save
      Saves header file under current name.

      Include save as
      Saves header file under new name.

      Print
      Allows following printing actions:
          All
          Allows the printing of all of the windows and dialogues contained
           within the design as a group.
        
          Displayed
          Allows the printing of the currently displayed window or dialogue.

      Print setup
      Allows the selection and setup of a print output device.

      Save design
      Saves the current window or dialogue displayed to allow it to be recalled
      as a pre-designed window or dialogue.

      Delete design
      Deletes a pre-designed window or dialogue.

      Include view/edit
      Permits viewing and editing of header information.

      Information
      Allows the viewing of information on the current window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. Help for New Design ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select New design on the File pull-down to create a new design file along with
a new header file and set up the base information required for the design.

When you select New design, the New Design dialogue appears.  Use it to define
the new design that you are creating.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. Help for Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Open on the File pull-down to edit an existing project design file.

When you select Open, the Open dialogue appears.  Use it to select the design
file you want to edit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. Help for Import ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Import on the File pull-down to import an existing .RES file, .RC file
(both OS/2 and Microsoft Windows) or the resources from a .DLL or .EXE file.

When you select Import, the Import Open dialogue appears.  Use it to select the
OS/2 or Windows file you want to import.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. Help for Merge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Merge on the File pull-down to merge an existing .RES file with the
current design.

When you select Merge, the File Merge dialogue appears.  Use it to select the
design file you want to merge with the current design.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. Help for Include New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Include new on the File pull-down to create a new header file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. Help for Include Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Include open on the File pull-down to open an existing header file.

When you select Include Open, the Include Open dialogue appears.  Use it to
select the file you want to use as the header file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. Help for Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save on the File pull-down to save the file you are editing.

Note:  Use Save As to save an untitled file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. Help for Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save as on the File pull-down to:

     Save a new file

     Save a file:

        -  With a different name

        -  In a different directory

        -  On a different disk

 When you choose this command, the Save As dialogue appears.  Use it to enter
 the drive, path and file name for the file.  You can also enter any historical
 information or comments relating to the project being worked on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. Help for Quick Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Quick save on the File pull-down to save the design you are currently
working on.

This will only save the design file and will not save the resource script file
or .RES file or any of the source code.

You should use this every now and again when you want to make sure that you
have safely saved the design file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. Help for Refresh .RES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Refresh .RES on the File pull-down to update and refresh the .RES files
for the current design when the external resources like bitmaps, icons and
pointers have been changed.

Only the resource files defined will be updated and the .PDF file along with
any associated sources will not be updated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. Help for Include Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Include Save on the File pull-down to save the include file you are
editing.

Note:  Use Include Save As to save an untitled include file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. Help for Include Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Include save as on the File pull-down to:

     Save a new file

     Save a file:

        -  With a different name

        -  In a different directory

        -  On a different disk

 When you choose this command, the Include Save As dialogue appears.  Use it to
 enter the drive, path and file name for the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. Help for Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To print the currently displayed window or dialogue, or, to print all of the
windows and dialogues, select Print from the File pull-down.

A sub-menu will be displayed from which you can select the type of printing
that you wish to perform.  Items that can be selected are:

     All.
     Displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. Help for Print All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Print all on the File Print pull-down to print the all windows or
dialogues that are within the design you are working on.

The Print Design dialogue will be displayed allowing you to select the general
placement of the image on the page and to specify a scaling value that is used
to scale the final image.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. Help for Print Displayed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Print displayed on the File Print pull-down to print the currently
displayed window or dialogue that you are working on.

The Print Design dialogue will be displayed allowing you to select the general
placement of the image on the page and to specify a scaling value that is used
to scale the final image.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. Help for Printer Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Printer setup function is used to select or setup the printer for which a
window or dialogue design is to be printed on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. Help for Save Design ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save design on the File pull-down to save the current window or dialogue
as a pre-designed entity that can be recalled using the Pre-designed menu item
in the Edit New pull-down menu.

Up to 256 windows or dialogues can be saved to disk as a pre-designed entity.
When you select the Pre-designed menu item in the Edit New pull-down menu, you
will be allowed to select a pre-designed window or dialogue to use instead of
creating the window or dialogue from scratch.

You will be presented with a dialogue asking for the name in which the design
should be saved under in the design library.  You can set the design library
path using Pre-design library entry field in the Options page of the Prominare
Designer Configuration dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. Help for Delete Design ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete design on the File pull-down to delete a pre-designed window or
dialogue.

Up to 256 windows or dialogues can be saved to disk as a pre-designed entity.
When you select the Pre-designed menu item in the Edit New pull-down menu, you
will be allowed to select a pre-designed window or dialogue to use instead of
creating the window or dialogue from scratch.

You will be presented with a dialogue showing the windows or dialogues that
have been created allowing you to select the design or design you wish to
delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. Help for Include View ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To view or edit include symbols and values, select the Include View on on the
File pull-down.

The Include View/Edit dialogue will be displayed listing all of the symbols and
corresponding values.  From this list, you can select the symbol and ID to
edit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. Help for Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Information menu item on the File menu allows you to view information for
the current window or dialogue that you are working on.  The Prominare Designer
Information dialogue will display such things are the number of controls,
accelerators, action bar and sub-menu items, and help table totals.  It will
also show the resource distribution.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Edit pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit pull-down contains commands that help you copy, delete, and change a
window or dialogues menus and controls.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Edit pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Edit pull-down are:

      Restore
      Restores previous version of window or dialogue.

      Cut
      Copies and deletes current window, dialogue or selected controls to
      clipboard.

      Copy
      Copies current window, dialogue or selected controls to clipboard.

      Paste
      Pastes a window, dialogue or controls into current project.

      Paste from file
      Allows the selection of another design file from which multiple
      dialogues, windows, resources, strings and association table items can be
      selected and pasted into the current design file.

      Delete
      Allows deletion of:
          Window or Dialogue.
          Control.
          Action Bar Menu.
          Sub-Menu Item.
          Accelerator.
          Association table item.
          Bitmap.
          Character table items.
          Font.
          Font directory.
          Help.
             -  Table.
             -  Table Item.
             -  Sub-Table.
             -  Sub-Table Item.
          Icon.
          Key table items.
          Message.
          Pointer.
          Resource.
          String.
          Key table items.
      New
      Allow creation of a new window or dialogue, popup menu, notebook page,
      Workplace settings page or the selection of a predesigned library window
      or dialogue.
      Pop-up menu.
      Styles
      Allows editing of the styles for the selected window, dialogue or
      control.
      Properties
      Allows the loading and memory properties to be set for:
          Accelerator Table.
          Dialogue.
          Message Table.
          String Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. Help for Restore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Restore on the Edit pull-down to restore the previous version of the
window or dialogue you are editing.

A message box will be displayed confirming your request to restore the previous
version of the window or dialogue.

Selecting the Yes push button will restore the previous version.

Selecting the No or Cancel push buttons will cancel the restoration of the
previous version.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. Help for Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Copy on the Edit pull-down, or press Ctrl+Insert to copy selected window
or dialogue to the Clipboard.

You can insert the window or dialogue you copy back into the project or in
another project using Paste.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. Help for Paste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Paste on the Edit pull-down, or press Shift+Insert to insert the window
or dialogue on the Clipboard into the file.

If window or dialogue is selected, from the Clipboard it will replace the
current window or dialogue unless you specifically tell Prominare Designer not
to.

Note:  Use Cut or Copy to put a window or dialogue on the Clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. Help for Paste from File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Paste from file on the Edit pull-down, or press Alt+Insert to be able to
select another design file from which you can paste multiple selections of
dialogues, windows, bitmaps, icons, pointers, strings, message or association
table items into the current design that you are working on.

When you select the item, you will first be asked to select the design file
from which you wish to paste items from.  Once the information from this design
file has been read into memory, you will then be presented with the Eiit File
Paste dialogue in which contains four notebook pages, Dialogues/Windows,
Resources, Strings/Mesages and Association Tables, which will list the
available items within each area.

You can then select items from each notebook page that will be pasted into the
current design.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. Help for Cut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Cut on the Edit pull-down, or press Shift+Delete to delete a window or
dialogue from the file and copy it to the Clipboard.

You can insert the window or dialogue you cut somewhere else in this file or in
another file using Paste.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a window, dialogue, control or resource, select Delete from the Edit
pull-down.

A sub-menu will be displayed in which items that you cannot delete will be
shown in a half-tone.  Items that can be selected are:

     Window or Dialogue.
     Control.
     Action Bar Menu.
     Sub-Menu Item.
     Accelerator.
     Association table item.
     Bitmap.
     Character table items.
     Font.
     Font directory.
     Help.
        -  Table.
        -  Table Item.
        -  Sub-Table.
        -  Sub-Table Item.
     Icon.
     Key table items.
     Message.
     Pointer.
     Resource.
     String.
     Key table items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. Help for Delete Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a window or dialogue, select Delete Window or Delete Dialogue from
the Edit pull-down.

A message box will be displayed confirming your request to delete the displayed
window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. Help for Delete Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a control or controls within the current window or dialogue, select
the Delete Control from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the controls contained within the
window or dialogue.  You can then select the control or controls to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. Help for Delete Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete an action bar item or items within the current window, select the
Delete Action Bar Menu from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the action bar menus contained
within the window.  You can then select the action bar menu or menus to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. Help for Delete Menu Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a sub-menu item or items within the current window, select the Delete
Sub-Menu Item from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the sub-menu items contained within
the window.  You can then select the sub-menu item or items to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. Help for Delete Accelerator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete an accelerator item or items within the current window, select the
Delete Accelerator from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the accelerator items contained
within the window.  You can then select the accelerator item or items to
delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. Help for Delete Association Table Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete an association table item or items, select the Delete Association
item from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the association table items. You
can then select the association table item or items to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. Help for Delete Bitmap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a bitmap item or items within the current window or dialogue, select
the Delete Bitmap from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the bitmap items contained within
the window or dialogue.  You can then select the bitmap item or items to
delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. Help for Delete Character Table Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete an character table item or items, select the Delete Character table
from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the character table items. You can
then select the character table item or items to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. Help for Delete Font ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a font item or items, select the Delete Font from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the font items contained within the
window or dialogue.  You can then select the font item or items to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. Help for Delete Font Direcotry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a font directory, select the Delete Font directory from the Edit
pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the font directories. You can then
select the font directory or directories to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. Help for Delete Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a help item within the current window or dialogue, select the Delete
Help from the Edit pull-down.

A sub-menu will be displayed with entries for Tables, Table Items, Sub-Tables
and Sub-Table Items.  From one of these sub-menu items, you can delete the
desired help item or items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. Help for Delete Help Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a help table or tables within the current window or dialogue, select
the Delete Help Table from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the help tables contained within
the window or dialogue.  You can then select the table item or items to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. Help for Delete Help Table Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a help table item or items within the current window or dialogue,
select the Delete Help Table Item from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the help table items contained
within the window or dialogue.  You can then select the table item or items to
delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. Help for Delete Help Sub-Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a help sub-table or sub-tables within the current window or dialogue,
select the Delete Help Sub-Table from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the help sub-tables contained
within the window or dialogue.  You can then select the sub-table item or items
to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. Help for Delete Help Sub-Table Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a help sub-table item or items within the current window or dialogue,
select the Delete Help Sub-Table Item from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the help sub-table items contained
within the window or dialogue.  You can then select the sub-table item or items
to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. Help for Delete Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete an icon or icons, select the Delete Icon from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the icons contained within the
window or dialogue.  You can then select the icon or icons to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. Help for Delete Key Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a key table, select the Delete Key table from the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the key tables. You can then select
the key table or tables to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. Help for Delete Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a message or messages, select the Delete Message from the Edit
pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the messages contained within the
window or dialogue.  You can then select the message or messages to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. Help for Delete Pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a pointer or pointers, select the Delete Pointer from the Edit
pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the pointers contained within the
window or dialogue.  You can then select the pointer or pointers to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. Help for Delete Resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a custom resource or resources, select the Delete Resource from the
Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the custom resources contained
within the window or dialogue.  You can then select the resource or resources
to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. Help for Delete String ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a string or strings, select the Delete String from the Edit
pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the strings contained within the
window or dialogue.  You can then select the string or strings to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. Help for Delete Virtual Key Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To delete a virtual key table, select the Delete Virtual key table from the
Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the virtual key tables. You can
then select the virtual key table or tables to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. Help for New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a new window/dialogue, popup menu, notebook page, Workplace Settings
page or select a window or dialogue from the predesigned library, select the
New from the Edit pull-down.

The  New Dialogue/Window dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to
select from predefined dialogue templates or select another type of window,
notebook page, Workplace Settings page to create.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80. Help for Pre-designed Window/Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Pre-designed Window/Dialogue dialogue is used to allow you to select the
pre-designed window or dialogue to use for the new window or dialogue that you
are creating.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81. Help for Edit Popup Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit an popup, select the Menu Popup menu on the Edit pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed which will allow you to change the ID symbol and
value for the popup menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82. Help for Edit Styles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the styles of a window, dialogue or control, select the Styles menu
item on the Edit menu.

This will allow you to change the text within the window, dialogue or control
along with the style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83. Help for Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To set the resource properties for a given resource type, select the Properties
from the Edit pull-down.

A sub-menu will be displayed allowing you to set the properties for the
following:

     Accelerator Table.
     Dialogue.
     Menu.
     Message Table.
     String Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84. Help for Accelerator Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Properties Accelerator from the Edit pull-down to edit the loading and
storage properties for the accelerators defined within window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85. Help for Dialogue Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Properties dialogue from the Edit pull-down to edit the loading and
storage properties for the dialogue displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86. Help for Menu Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Properties Menu from the Edit pull-down to edit the loading and storage
properties for the menus defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87. Help for Message Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Properties Messages from the Edit pull-down to edit the loading and
storage properties for the messages defined within window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 88. Help for String Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Properties String from the Edit pull-down to edit the loading and
storage properties for the strings defined within window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 89. Help for Find Pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Find pull-down contains items you can use to search the current design for
text or a symbol/ID.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Find pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Find pull-down are:

      Search
      Allows the searchig of a text string or symbol/ID.

      Search next
      Searchs for the next occurance of entered text string or symbol/ID.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 90. Help for Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Search from the Find pull-down to search for an ID value or text item.
The Search dialogue will allow you to enter a text string to search for or an
ID symbol to locate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 91. Help for Search Next ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Search next from the Find pull-down to search for the next occurance an
ID value or text item.  The search will start from the next dialogue after the
current dialogue being displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 92. Help for Control Pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Control pull-down contains items you can use to create different types of
controls within the window or dialogue you are designing.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Control pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Control pull-down are:

      Push Button
      Creates a push button.

      Check Box
      Creates a check box.

      Radio Button
      Creates a radio button.

      Horz. Scroll
      Creates a horizontal scroll bar.

      Vert. Scroll
      Creates a vertical scroll bar.

      List Box
      Creates a list box.

      Ettry Field
      Creates an entry field.

      Group Box
      Creates a group box.

      Text
      Creates text.

      Frame
      Creates a frame.

      Rectangle
      Creates a rectangle.

      Icon
      Creates a static icon.

      Bitmap
      Creates a static bitmap.

      System Icon
      Creates a system icon.

      Combo Box
      Creates a combo box.

      Multi-Line
      Creates a multi-line entry field.

      Spin button
      Creates a spin button (1.3 or above).

      Container
      Creates a container (2.0 or above).

      Slider
      Creates a slider (2.0 or above).

      Value Set
      Creates a value set (2.0 or above).

      Notebook
      Creates a notebook (2.0 or above).

      User define
      Creates a user defined control.

      Circular slider (MMPM/2 only)
      Creates a circular slider.

      Graphic button (MMPM/2 only)
      Creates a graphic button.

      Handwriting control (Pen for OS/2 only)
      Creates a handwriting control.

      Sketch control (Pen for OS/2 only)
      Creates a sketch control.

      Window
      Creates a child window.

      Menu
      Creates or edits an action bar or sub-menu item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 93. Help for Push Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Push Button on the Control pull-down menu to add a push button to the
dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Push
Button on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the push
button, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the push button to be created
and a dialogue for button styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text,
ID symbol and value of the button.

Note:  When you select the location for the push button by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the push button occupy this position
       and the push button will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 94. Help for Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the characteristics of interactive buttons within a dialogue, the
Buttons Styles dialogue can be used.

The dialogue is displayed when you select a button in the dialogue you are
designing or editing and you select the Edit Styles menu item or when you
select a button control type from the Control menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 95. Help for Scroll Bars ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the characteristics of scroll bar within a dialogue, the Scroll
Styles dialogue can be used.

The dialogue is displayed when you select a scroll bar in the dialogue you are
designing or editing and you select the Edit Styles menu item or when you
select the Horz. Scroll or Vert. Scroll menu items from the Control menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 96. Help for Statics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the characteristics of a static control such as text, group boxes,
icons, etc. within a dialogue, the Static Styles dialogue can be used.

The dialogue is displayed when you select a static control in the dialogue you
are designing or editing and you select the Edit Styles menu item or when you
select the Group Box, Text, Frame, Rectangle, Icon, or Bitmap menu items from
the Control menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 97. Help for Check Boxes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Check Box on the Control pull-down menu to add a check box to the
dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Check
Box on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the check
box, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the check box to be created and
a dialogue for button styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text, ID
symbol and value of the button.

Note:  When you select the location for the check box by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the check box occupy this position
       and the check box will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 98. Help for Radio Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Radio Button on the Control pull-down menu to add a radio button to the
dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Radio
Button on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the radio
button, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the radio button to be
created and a dialogue for button styles to be displayed to allow you to edit
the text, ID symbol and value of the button.

Note:  When you select the location for the radio button by clicking button 1
       of the mouse, the lower left corner of the radio button occupy this
       position and the radio button will be created upwards and to the right
       of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 99. Help for Horizontal Scroll Bars ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Horz. Scroll on the Control pull-down menu to add a horizontal scroll
bar to the dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Horz.
Scroll on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the
horizontal scroll bar, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the horizontal
scroll bar to be created and a dialogue for scroll bar styles to be displayed
to allow you to edit the ID symbol and value of the scroll bar.

Note:  When you select the location for the scroll bar by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the scroll bar occupy this position
       and the scroll bar will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 100. Help for Vertical Scroll Bars ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Vert. Scroll on the Control pull-down menu to add a vertical scroll bar
to the dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Vert.
Scroll on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the vertical
scroll bar, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the vertical scroll bar
to be created and a dialogue for scroll bar styles to be displayed to allow you
to edit the ID symbol and value of the scroll bar.

Note:  When you select the location for the scroll bar by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the scroll bar occupy this position
       and the scroll bar will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 101. Help for List Boxes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select List Box on the Control pull-down menu to add a list box to the dialogue
currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting List
Box on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the list box,
clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the list box to be created and a
dialogue for static styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text, ID
symbol and value of the list box.

Note:  When you select the location for the list box by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the list box occupy this position
       and the list box will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 102. Help for Entry Fields ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Entry Field on the Control pull-down menu to add an entry field to the
dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Entry
Field on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the entry
field, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the entry field to be created
and a dialogue for entry field styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the
ID symbol and value of the entry field.

Note:  When you select the location for the entry field by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the entry field occupy this position
       and the entry field will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 103. Help for Group Boxes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Group Box on the Control pull-down menu to add a group box to the
dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Group
Box on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the group
box, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the group box to be created and
a dialogue for static styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text, ID
symbol and value of the group box.

Note:  When you select the location for the group box by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the group box occupy this position
       and the group box will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 104. Help for Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Text on the Control pull-down menu to add static text to the dialogue
currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Text
on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the static
text, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the static text to be created
and a dialogue for static styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text,
ID symbol and value of the static text.

Note:  When you select the location for the static text by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the static text occupy this position
       and the static text will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 105. Help for Frames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Frame on the Control pull-down menu to add a frame to the dialogue
currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Frame
on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the frame,
clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the frame to be created and a
dialogue for static styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text, ID
symbol and value of the frame.

Note:  When you select the location for the frame by clicking button 1 of the
       mouse, the lower left corner of the frame occupy this position and the
       frame will be created upwards and to the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 106. Help for Rectangles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Rectangle on the Control pull-down menu to add a rectangle to the
dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting
Rectangle on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of
the Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the
rectangle, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the rectangle to be
created and a dialogue for static styles to be displayed to allow you to edit
the text, ID symbol and value of the rectangle.

Note:  When you select the location for the rectangle by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the rectangle occupy this position
       and the rectangle will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 107. Help for Icons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Icon on the Control pull-down menu to add an icon to the dialogue
currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Icon
on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the icon,
clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the icon to be created and a dialogue
for static styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text, ID symbol and
value of the icon.

Note:  When you select the location for the icon by clicking button 1 of the
       mouse, the lower left corner of the icon occupy this position and the
       icon will be created upwards and to the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 108. Help for Bitmaps ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Bitmap on the Control pull-down menu to add a bitmap to the dialogue
currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Bitmap
on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the bitmap,
clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the bitmap to be created and a
dialogue for static styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text, ID
symbol and value of the bitmap.

Note:  When you select the location for the bitmap by clicking button 1 of the
       mouse, the lower left corner of the bitmap occupy this position and the
       bitmap will be created upwards and to the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 109. Help for System Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select System Icon on the Control pull-down menu to add a system icon to the
dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Bitmap
on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the system
icon, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the system icon to be created
and a dialogue for static styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text,
system icon ID symbol and value.

Unlike other controls, you cannot enter values that are not a system icon.  The
system icons that can be selected are:

      SPTR_ARROW
      SPTR_TEXT
      SPTR_WAIT
      SPTR_SIZE
      SPTR_MOVE
      SPTR_SIZENWSE
      SPTR_SIZENESW
      SPTR_SIZEWE
      SPTR_SIZENS
      SPTR_APPICON
      SPTR_ICONINFORMATION
      SPTR_ICONQUESTION
      SPTR_ICONERROR
      SPTR_ICONWARNING
      SPTR_ILLEGAL
      SPTR_FILE
      SPTR_FOLDER
      SPTR_MULTFILE
      SPTR_PROGRAM

 Note:  When you select the location for the bitmap by clicking button 1 of the
        mouse, the lower left corner of the bitmap occupy this position and the
        bitmap will be created upwards and to the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 110. Help for Combo Boxes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Combo Box on the Control pull-down menu to add a combo box to the
dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Combo
Box on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the combo
box, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the combo box to be created and
a dialogue for combo box styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text,
ID symbol and value of the combo box.

Note:  When you select the location for the combo box by clicking button 1 of
       the mouse, the lower left corner of the combo box occupy this position
       and the combo box will be created upwards and to the right of this
       position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 111. Help for Multi-Line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Multi-Line on the Control pull-down menu to add a multi-line entry to
the dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting
Multi-Line on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of
the Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the
multi-line entry, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the multi-line
entry to be created and a dialogue for multi-line entry styles to be displayed
to allow you to edit the text, ID symbol and value of the multi-line entry.

Note:  When you select the location for the multi-line entry by clicking button
       1 of the mouse, the lower left corner of the multi-line entry occupy
       this position and the multi-line entry will be created upwards and to
       the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 112. Help for Spin Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  Valid only for OS/2 Version 1.3 and above.

 Select Spin button on the Control pull-down menu to add a spin button to the
 dialogue currently being designed.

 The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Spin
 button on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
 Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
 placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

 By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the spin
 button, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the spin button to be
 created and a dialogue for spin button styles to be displayed to allow you to
 edit the text, ID symbol and value of the spin button.

 Note:  When you select the location for the spin button by clicking button 1
        of the mouse, the lower left corner of the spin button occupy this
        position and the spin button will be created upwards and to the right
        of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 113. Help for Container ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  Valid only for OS/2 Version 2.0 and above.

 Select Container on the Control pull-down menu to add a container to the
 dialogue or window currently being designed.

 The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting
 Container on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of
 the Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
 placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

 By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the
 container, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the container to be
 created and a dialogue for container styles to be displayed to allow you to
 edit the text, ID symbol and value of the container.

 Note:  When you select the location for the container entry by clicking button
        1 of the mouse, the lower left corner of the container occupy this
        position and the container will be created upwards and to the right of
        this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 114. Help for Slider ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  Valid only for OS/2 Version 2.0 and above.

 Select Slider on the Control pull-down menu to add a container to the dialogue
 or window currently being designed.

 The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting
 Slider on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
 Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
 placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

 By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the slider,
 clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the slider to be created and a
 dialogue for container styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text,
 ID symbol and value of the slider.

 Note:  When you select the location for the slider entry by clicking button 1
        of the mouse, the lower left corner of the slider occupy this position
        and the slider will be created upwards and to the right of this
        position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 115. Help for Value Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  Valid only for OS/2 Version 2.0 and above.

 Select Value set on the Control pull-down menu to add a container to the
 dialogue or window currently being designed.

 The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Value
 set on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
 Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
 placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

 By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the value
 set, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the value set to be created and
 a dialogue for value set styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the text,
 ID symbol and value of the value set.

 Note:  When you select the location for the value set entry by clicking button
        1 of the mouse, the lower left corner of the value set occupy this
        position and the value set will be created upwards and to the right of
        this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 116. Help for Notebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  Valid only for OS/2 Version 2.0 and above.

 Select Notebook on the Control pull-down menu to add a notebook to the
 dialogue or window currently being designed.

 The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting
 Notebook on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of
 the Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
 placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

 By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the
 notebook, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the notebook to be created
 and a dialogue for notebook styles to be displayed to allow you to edit the
 text, ID symbol and value of the notebook.

 Note:  When you select the location for the notebook entry by clicking button
        1 of the mouse, the lower left corner of the notebook occupy this
        position and the notebook will be created upwards and to the right of
        this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 117. Help for User Defined ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select User define on the Control pull-down menu to select a custom control.

A dialogue will be displayed that will allow you to select from temporary
controls that you have set as well as from control libraries.

Once you have selected the control to use, the arrow pointer will be changed to
a placement pointer.  In the status area at the bottom of the Prominare
Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the placement
pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the user
defined control, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the user defined
control to be created and a dialogue for user defined controls to be displayed
to allow you to edit the classname, text, ID symbol and value of the control.

Note:  When you select the location for the user defined control by clicking
       button 1 of the mouse, the lower left corner of the user defined control
       occupy this position and the user defined control will be created
       upwards and to the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 118. Help for Circular Slider ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  Valid only for OS/2 MMPM/2.

 Select Circular Slider on the Control pull-down menu to add a circular slider
 to the dialogue or window currently being designed.

 The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting
 Circular Slider on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the
 bottom of the Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current
 position of the placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the
 dialogue.

 By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the circular
 slider, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the circular slider to be
 created and a dialogue for circular slider styles to be displayed to allow you
 to edit the text, ID symbol and value of the notebook.

 Note:  When you select the location for the circular slider entry by clicking
        button 1 of the mouse, the lower left corner of the circular slider
        occupy this position and the circular slider will be created upwards
        and to the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 119. Help for Graphic Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  Valid only for OS/2 MMPM/2.

 Select Graphic Button on the Control pull-down menu to add a graphical button
 to the dialogue or window currently being designed.

 The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting
 Graphic Button on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the
 bottom of the Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current
 position of the placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the
 dialogue.

 By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the
 graphical button, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the graphical
 button to be created and a dialogue for graphical button styles to be
 displayed to allow you to edit the text, ID symbol and value of the graphical
 button.

 Note:  When you select the location for the graphical button entry by clicking
        button 1 of the mouse, the lower left corner of the graphical button
        occupy this position and the graphical button will be created upwards
        and to the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 120. Help for Handwriting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  Valid only for Pen for OS/2.

 Select Handwriting on the Control pull-down menu to add a handwriting control
 to the dialogue or window currently being designed.

 The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting
 Handwriting on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom
 of the Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of
 the placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

 By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the
 handwriting control, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the handwriting
 control to be created and a dialogue for handwriting control styles to be
 displayed to allow you to edit the text, ID symbol and value of the notebook.

 Note:  When you select the location for the handwriting control entry by
        clicking button 1 of the mouse, the lower left corner of the
        handwriting control occupy this position and the handwriting control
        will be created upwards and to the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 121. Help for Sketch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  Valid only for Pen for OS/2.

 Select Sketch on the Control pull-down menu to add a sketch control to the
 dialogue or window currently being designed.

 The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting
 Sketch on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
 Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
 placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

 By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the sketch
 control, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the sketch control to be
 created and a dialogue for sketch control styles to be displayed to allow you
 to edit the text, ID symbol and value of the notebook.

 Note:  When you select the location for the sketch control entry by clicking
        button 1 of the mouse, the lower left corner of the sketch control
        occupy this position and the sketch control will be created upwards and
        to the right of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 122. Help for Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Window on the Control pull-down menu to add a child window to the
dialogue currently being designed.

The arrow pointer will be changed to a placement pointer after selecting Window
on the Control pull-down menu.  In the status area at the bottom of the
Prominare Designer window, the [x,y] will show the current position of the
placement pointer in relation to the lower left corner of the dialogue.

By moving the placement pointer to the location you want to place the child
window, clicking button 1 of the mouse will cause the child window to be
created and a dialogue for window styles to be displayed to allow you to edit
the text, ID symbol and value of the child window.

Note:  When you select the location for the child window by clicking button 1
       of the mouse, the lower left corner of the child window occupy this
       position and the child window will be created upwards and to the right
       of this position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 123. Help for Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Menu on the Control pull-down menu to add an action bar or sub-menu item
to the window currently being designed.

A dialogue for menu styles will be displayed to allow you to edit the text, ID
symbol and value of the menu item.

Note:  You can only add a menu's to windows that have had the menu style option
       selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 124. Help for Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a resource to the current window or dialogue, select the Resource
pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Resource pull-down are:

      Accelerator
      Adds an accelerator.

      Association table
      Adds an association table item.

      Bitmap
      Adds a bitmap resource.

      Character table
      Adds a character table.

      Font
      Adds a font resource.

      Font directory
      Adds a font directory.

      Help
      Adds help tables consisting of:
          Table.
          Table Item.
          Sub-Table.
          Sub-Table Item.
          Build Help Table.
          Build Help Sub-Table.
      Icon
      Adds an icon resource.

      Key table
      Adds a key table.

      Message
      Adds a message resource.

      Pointer
      Adds a pointer resource.

      Resource
      Adds a custom resource.

      String
      Adds a string resource.

      Virtual key table
      Adds a virtual key table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 125. Help for Accelerator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Accelerator on the Resource pull-down menu to add an accelerator to the
design currently being worked on.

Note:  Accelerators can only be added to windows that have the Accelerator
       option selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 126. Help for Association Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Association table on the Resource pull-down menu to add an association
table item to the design currently being worked on.

The Association Table dialogue will be displayed allowing you to enter the
specific association information or to edit an existing entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 127. Help for Bitmap Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Bitmap on the Resource pull-down menu to add a bitmap resource to the
window or dialogue currently being designed.

A dialogue will be displayed to allow you to enter the ID symbol and value of
the bitmap resource along with the path and filename of the actual bitmap
resource that you have created or will be creating.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 128. Help for Character Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Character table on the Resource pull-down menu to add an character table
item to the design currently being worked on.

The Resource Table will be displayed allowing you to enter the specific
character table or to edit an existing entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 129. Help for Font Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Font on the Resource pull-down menu to add a font resource to the window
or dialogue currently being designed.

A dialogue will be displayed to allow you to enter the ID symbol and value of
the font resource along with the path and filename of the actual font resource
that you have created or will be creating.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 130. Help for Font Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Font directory on the Resource pull-down menu to add a font directory to
the design currently being worked on.

The Resource Table will be displayed allowing you to enter the specific font
directory or to edit an existing entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 131. Help for Help Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Help on the Resource pull-down menu to add a help tables to the window
or dialogue currently being designed.

The sub-menu associated with the menu item will allow you to select the type of
help you wish to add to the window or dialogue.  The items of the sub-menu are:

     Table.
     Table Item.
     Sub-Table.
     Sub-Table Item.
     Build Help Table.
     Build Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 132. Help for Help Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a help table, select the Help Table on the Resource pull-down.

A dialogue will be presented allowing you to define the help table you wish to
add for the current window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 133. Help for Help Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a help table item, select the Help Table Item on the Resource pull-down.

A dialogue will be presented allowing you to define the help table item you
wish to add for the current window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 134. Help for Help Sub-Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a help sub-table, select the Help Sub-Table on the Resource pull-down.

A dialogue will be presented allowing you to define the help sub-table you wish
to add for the current window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 135. Help for Help Sub-Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a help sub-table item, select the Help Sub-Table Item on the Resource
pull-down.

A dialogue will be presented allowing you to define the help sub-table item you
wish to add for the current window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 136. Help for Build Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Build Table on the Resource pull-down menu to build the Help Table for
the project currently being designed or edited.

A Help Table will be created based on all Help Sub-Tables defined for the
project.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 137. Help for Build Sub-Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Build Sub-Table on the Resource pull-down menu to build the Help
Sub-Table for the window or dialogue currently being designed or edited.

A Help Sub-Table will be created based on controls that require user
interaction such as push buttons, check boxes, etc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 138. Help for Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a bitmap, font, icon or pointer, select the Bitmap, Font, Icon or
Pointer on the Resource pull-down.

A dialogue will be presented allowing you to define the bitmap, font, icon or
pointer you wish to add for the current window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 139. Help for Key Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Key table on the Resource pull-down menu to add a key table item to the
design currently being worked on.

The Resource Table will be displayed allowing you to enter the specific key
table or to edit an existing entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 140. Help for Message Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Message on the Resource pull-down menu to add a message resource to the
window or dialogue currently being designed.

A dialogue will be displayed to allow you to enter the ID symbol and value of
the message resource along with the actual message string that you wish to add.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 141. Help for Pointer Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Pointer on the Resource pull-down menu to add a pointer resource to the
window or dialogue currently being designed.

A dialogue will be displayed to allow you to enter the ID symbol and value of
the pointer resource along with the path and filename of the actual pointer
resource that you have created or will be creating.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 142. Help for Custom Resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit a custom resource that you have defined, select the Resource on the
Resource pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the custom resources defined for
the window or dialogue from which you can select a custom resource to change.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 143. Help for String ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit a message or string, select Message or String on the Resource
pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed listing all of the messages or strings defined for
the window or dialogue from which you can select a message or string to change.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 144. Help for Virtual Key Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Virtual key table on the Resource pull-down menu to add a virtual key
table item to the design currently being worked on.

The Resource Table will be displayed allowing you to enter the specific virtual
key table or to edit an existing entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Rules pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Rules pull-down contains items you can use to customize the default source
created through Prominare Designer.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Rules pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Rules pull-down are:

      Messages
      Allows definition of default source code for window, dialogue and
      notification messages.

      Source
      Allows definition of source code components.

      Command
      Allows the definition of WM_COMMAND source code handling.

      Layout
      Allows selection of default messages to be included as layouts for window
      and dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 145. Help for Rules Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Rules Messages pull-down contains items you can use to define the default
source for window, dialogue and notification messages that are included within
your window and dialogue procedures.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Messages pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Messages pull-down are:

      Window
      Allows definition of default source code for window messages.

      Dialogue
      Allows definition of default source code for dialogue messages.

      Notification
      Allows definition of default source code for notification messages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 146. Help for Rules Messages Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

to edit the default message handling for windows, select the Window menu item
on the Rules Messages menu.  A dialogue will be displayed showing a list of
messages that are valid for windows that you create within your current design.

By selecting a message, the default source code for that message will be
displayed and you will be able to then edit that default code to suit the needs
that you may have for the application or for any other code that is generated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 147. Help for Rules Messages Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default message handling for dialogues, select the Dialogue menu
item on the Rules Messages menu.  A dialogue will be displayed showing a list
of messages that are valid for dialogues that you create within your current
design.

By selecting a message, the default source code for that message will be
displayed and you will be able to then edit that default code to suit the needs
that you may have for the application or for any other code that is generated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 148. Help for Rules Messages Notification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default message handling for notification messages, select the
Notification menu item on the Rules Messages menu. A dialogue will be displayed
showing a list of notification messages that are valid for the controls that
you include within your current design.

By selecting a message, the default source code for that message will be
displayed and you will be able to then edit that default code to suit the needs
that you may have for the application or for any other code that is generated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 149. Help for Rules Source ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Rules Source pull-down contains items you can use to define the default
source for start of modules and headers as well as the start of window and
dialogue procedures.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Source pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Source pull-down are:

      Module start
      Allows definition of the start of source modules.

      Header start
      Allows definition of the start of header modules.

      Window declaration
      Allows definition of the start of window procedures.

      Child window declaration
      Allows definition of the start of a child window procedures.

      Dialogue declaration
      Allows definition of the start of dialogue procedures.

      main( )
      Allows definition of the main( ) procedure.

      Support module
      Allows definition of the Support.C or Support.Cpp module.

      Application definitions
      Allows definition of the AppDefs.C or AppDefs.Cpp module.

      Application definitions header
      Allows definition of the AppDefs.H or AppDefs.Hpp header.

      XxxxRegister
      Allows definition of the XxxxRegister function for a PMCX custom control.

      XxxxQuery
      Allows definition of the XxxxQuery function for a PMCX custom control.

      XxxxStyles
      Allows definition of the XxxxStyles function for a PMCX custom control.

      XxxxWndProc
      Allows definition of the XxxxWndProc function for a PMCX custom control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 150. Help for Rules Source Modules Start ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for the start of a module, select the Module start
menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the start of new source modules when a new source
module is first created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 151. Help for Rules Source Header Start ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for the start of a header include file, select the
Header start menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the start of new source include headers when a new
source include header is first created when source code is generated by
Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 152. Help for Rules Source Window Declaration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a window declaration, select the Window
declaration menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for a window procedure when a new window procudure is
first created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 153. Help for Rules Source Child Window Declaration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a child window declaration, select the Child
window declaration menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for a window procedure when a new child window procudure
is first created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 154. Help for Rules Source Dialogue Declaration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a dialogue declaration, select the Window
declaration menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for a dialogue procedure when a new window procudure is
first created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 155. Help for Rules main( ) Declaration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a main( ) declaration, select the main( ) menu
item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the main( ) procedure it is first created when
source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 156. Help for Rules Support Module Declaration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a Support.C or Support.Cpp module, select the
Support module menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the body of the Support.C or Support.Cpp module when
it is first created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 157. Help for Rules Applications Definitions Module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a AppDefs.C or AppDefs.Cpp module, select the
Application definitions menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the body of the AppDefs.C or AppDefs.Cpp module when
it is first created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 158. Help for Rules Applications Definitions Header Module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a AppDefs.H or AppDefs.Hpp module, select the
Application definitions menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the body of the AppDefs.H or AppDefs.Hpp module when
it is first created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 159. Help for Rules XxxxRegister ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for the XxxxRegister function of a PMCX control,
select the XxxxRegister menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the body of the XxxxRegister function when it is
first created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 160. Help for Rules XxxxQuery ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for the XxxxQuery function of a PMCX control, select
the XxxxQuery menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the body of the XxxxQuery function when it is first
created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 161. Help for Rules XxxxStyles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for the XxxxStyles function of a PMCX control,
select the XxxxStyles menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the body of the XxxxStyles function when it is first
created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 162. Help for Rules XxxxWndProc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for the XxxxWndProc function of a PMCX control,
select the XxxxWndProc menu item on the Rules Source menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code that will be used for the body of the XxxxWndProc function when it is
first created when source code is generated by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 163. Help for Rules Command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Rules Command pull-down contains items you can use to define the default
source for the handling of WM_COMMAND messages of window and dialogue
procedures.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Command pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Command pull-down are:

      Menu
      Allows definition of the menu selections.

      Push Button
      Allows definition of the push button selections.

      User Button
      Allows definition of user button selections.

      User Defined
      Allows definition of user define selections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 164. Help for Rules Command Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a menu selection, select the Menu menu item on
the Rules Command menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code for different methods when a menu item is selected within a window
procudure.  The menu item is placed within the handling of the WM_COMMAND
message and can be used to invoke other dialogues and create windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 165. Help for Rules Push Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a push button selection, select the Push Button
menu item on the Rules Command menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code for different methods when a push button is selected within a window
procudure.  The push button is placed within the handling of the WM_COMMAND
message and can be used to invoke other dialogues and create windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 166. Help for Rules Command User Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a user button selection, select the User Button
menu item on the Rules Command menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code for different methods when a user button is selected within a window
procudure.  The user button is placed within the handling of the WM_COMMAND
message and can be used to invoke other dialogues and create windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 167. Help for Rules Command User Defined ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a user defined selection, select the User
Defined menu item on the Rules Command menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter the default source
code for different methods when a user defined is selected within a window
procudure.  The user defined is placed within the handling of the WM_COMMAND
message and can be used to invoke other dialogues and create windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 168. Help for Rules Layout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Rules Layout pull-down contains items you can use to define the messages
that are to be included by default within new window and dialogues you created.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Layout pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Layout pull-down are:

      Window
      Allows definition of the messages to include within the default code for
      windows.

      Dialogue
      Allows definition of the messages to include within the default code for
      dialogues.

      PMCX window
      Allows definition of the messages to include within the default code for
      PMCX control window.

      PMCX dialogue
      Allows definition of the messages to include within the default code for
      PMCX Styles dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 169. Help for Rules Layout Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a window, select the Window menu item on the
Rules Layout menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to select the messages that
are included by default when you create a new window.  This allows you to
through the other Rules menu items, define exactly the default source code you
want to use both on an individual message basis and window procedure basis.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 170. Help for Rules Layout Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for a window, select the Dialogue menu item on the
Rules Layout menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to select the messages that
are included by default when you create a new dialogue.  This allows you to
through the other Rules menu items, define exactly the default source code you
want to use both on an individual message basis and dialogue procedure basis.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 171. Help for Rules Layout PMCX Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for the PMCX control window, select the PMCX window
menu item on the Rules Layout menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to select the messages that
are included by default when you create a new window.  This allows you to
through the other Rules menu items, define exactly the default source code you
want to use both on an individual message basis and window procedure basis.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 172. Help for Rules Layout PMCX Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To edit the default coding for the PMCX XxxxStyles dialogue, select the PMCX
dialogue menu item on the Rules Layout menu.

A dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to select the messages that
are included by default when you create a new window.  This allows you to
through the other Rules menu items, define exactly the default source code you
want to use both on an individual message basis and window procedure basis.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 173. Text Input ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Through the dialogue, you enter the text for the rule component.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 174. Message Body Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Through the dialogue, you enter the code and variables for the rule component.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Configure pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Configure pull-down contains items you can use to customize the Prominare
Designer.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Configure pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Configure pull-down are:

      Creation options
      Allows the setting of default window, dialogue and control creation
      options such as text, size and styles.

      CUA compliance
      Allows the setting of CUA compliance checking.

      Configure
      Allows the setting of the Prominare Designer configuration.

      .DFM registration
      Allows the setting of the display units for different display types.

      Custom controls
      Allows the definition of the location or locations where the custom
      controls are located and to register them within Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 175. Help for Default Creation Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Default Creation Options dialogue is used to define the default
characteristics for windows or dialogues created through the New menu item.  It
is also allows you to define the default characteristics for various types of
controls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 176. Help for Dialogue/Window Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Yoy can set through the Dialogue/Window notebook page the options that are to
be used when creating a dialogue or window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 177. Mouse Usage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mouse Usage notebook page allows you to define how you want to use the
mouse when interacting with controls and windows within a displayed window or
dialogue.

You can set the mouse/keyboard combination for the following actions:

      Select control
      Add/Subtract group item
      Move group
      Rubber band select
      Set group anchor
      Select styles dialogue
      Show info


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 178. Help for Extensions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Extensions notebook page is used to set the extensions for the include,
resource script and binary files.  You can define the extensions to use by
default for:

      OS/2 1.x
      OS/2 2.x
      Workplace OS
      Windows 3.1
      Windows NT


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 179. Help for CUA Compliance Rules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CUA Compliance dialogue is used to define SAA Compliance rules that
Prominare Designer will follow when creating windows, dialogues and controls.

The CUA Compliance rules are checked each time you create or edit a window,
dialogue or control and if the item is non-compliant, Prominare Designer will
display an error message stating what is non-compliant.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 180. Help for Configure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Configure on the File Defaults pull-down to set the configuration of
various items that are used within Prominare Designer such as the path where
the master source definitions rules are located and the path where the
predesigned library is located.

When you create a new project, you can have Prominare Designer copy the rules
to the new project area to allow you to edit the rules for the project.

If you do not have Prominare Designer copy the rules to the project area, the
master rules defined through the Rules Path dialogue will be used to generate
the source code for the design created.

It is also used to set the custom control library items and the symbol
prefixes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 181. Help for Display Units ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display units function is used to allow you to enter conversion values for
given display types and resolutions such that you to easily determine if a
window or dialogue you are designing will be properly displayed on a given
display.  The Display Units dialogue allows you to define any number of
displays that your program may run on.  A set of predefined values are present
such that you only need to add the displays that you have encountered that are
different than those on the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 182. Help for Custom Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Custom Controls dialogue is used to define the custom controls that conform
to the PMCX definition and that you want to use within Prominare Designer.

You can also use the dialogue to define a temporary control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Options pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Options pull-down contains items you can use to customize the Prominare
Designer.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Options pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Options pull-down are:

      Arrange controls
      Allows arranging display order of controls.

      Arrange menus
      Allows arranging display order of menus.

      Define design
      Allows base information for design to be set.

      Resource distribution
      Allows the definition of the location or locations where the resource
      elements are to be placed.

      PMCX definition
      Allows the definition of the PMCX control that you are creating.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 183. Help for Arranging Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To arrange the display order of controls within a window or dialogue, select
Arrange Controls on the Options pull-down menu.

A dialogue will be displayed with a list of all the controls in the window or
dialogue.  You can then select a control and move its relative display order to
another position.

You can also set groups and tab stops within the dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 184. Help for Arranging Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To arrange the display order of menus within a window, select Arrange Menus on
the Options pull-down menu.

A dialogue will be displayed with a list of all the menus in the window.  You
can then select a menu item and move its relative display order to another
position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 185. Help for Symbol Generation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can have Prominare Designer help you generate symbols for the controls you
create using a convention that you can also set.  The Symbol generation menu
item is used to dsiplay a dialogue that contains various entry fields where you
can enter the prefix of the control symbol.

You can also state whether or not Prominare Designer should generate the
symbols automatically or to aid the symbol prefix.

Also, to aid the prevention of duplicate ID symbols within the current window
or dialogue, you can have Prominare Designer check each symbol.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 186. Help for Define Design ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Define design on the Options pull-down menu to define necessary
information that Prominare Designer needs to be able to correctly generate the
resultant source code for the project being worked on.

The information that you would enter through Define Design would be the project
base name, main( ) function filename, help filename and tasklist entry.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 187. Help for Resource Distribution ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the locations and files under which resource elements are to be
placed, select the Resource distribution menu item within the Options menu.

The Resource Distribution Definition dialogue will be displayed allowing you to
specify locations and filenames under which dialogues, windows, accelerator
tables, etc. can be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 188. Help for PMCX Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the custom control that you are designing, you use the PMCX
definition menu item within the Options pull-down menu.

This will allow you to define the name of the custom control, author, class,
text limits, size and support.

The PMCX Creation dialogue will be displayed thereby allowing you to enter or
edit the information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Window list pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Window list pull-down contains the list of applications that are currently
running.  Selecting one of the menu items causes that application to be placed
in the foreground if possible.

Only those applications that have placed an entry within the Window List will
be displayed within the menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Help pull-down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help pull-down contains items you can use to get different types of online
help for the Prominare Designer.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Help pull-down.

The menu items contained within the Help pull-down are:

      Help index
      Display Help index.

      General help
      Displays General help.

      Using help
      Displays using help.

      Keys help
      Displays program keys help.

      Support
      Displays support sub-menu which consists of the following items:
          Submit problem.
          Submit suggestion.

      Product information
      Displays program product information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 189. Help for Using Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Using help on the Help pull-down for information on how to use the
Prominare Designer help facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 190. Help for General Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select General Help on the Help pull-down to see the extended help panel for
the Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 191. Help for Keys help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Keys Help on the Help pull-down for help on the keys you use to perform
a specific task,

When you select this item, you see a list of key groups.  Double click on one
of the groups to see the keys you use to perform the task.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 192. Help for Help index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Help Index on the Help pull-down to see the help index for the Prominare
Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 193. Help for Product information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Product information on the Help pull-down menu to display copyright
information about Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 194. Help for Add Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Help Menu push button in the Edit Menu Styles dialogue to create the
corresponding help menu for the Help action bar menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 195. Help for Add Sys Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Sys Menu push button in the Edit Menu Styles dialogue to create the
corresponding system menu for the action bar menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 196. Help for Default Check Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of check boxes when created using the
Control Check Box menu item, the Check Box notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles, text and size of
check boxes when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows you
to preview the styles, text and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 197. Help for Default Combo Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of combo boxes when created using the
Control Combo Box menu item, the Combo Box notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles, text and size of
combo boxes when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows you
to preview the styles, text and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 198. Help for Default Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of entry fields when created using the
Control Edit menu item, the Edit Box notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles, text and size of
entry fields when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows
you to preview the styles, text and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 199. Help for Default Group Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of group boxes when created using the
Control Group Box menu item, the Group Box notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles, text and size of
group boxes when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows you
to preview the styles, text and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 200. Help for Default List Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of list boxes when created using the
Control List Box menu item, the List Box notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles, text and size of
list boxes when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows you
to preview the styles, text and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 201. Help for Default Multi-Line Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of multi-line entry when created using
the Control Multi-Line menu item, the Multi-Line notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles, text and size of
multi-line entry when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also
allows you to preview the styles, text and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 202. Help for Default Push Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of push buttons when created using the
Control Push Button menu item, the Push Buttons notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles, text and size of
push buttons when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows
you to preview the styles, text and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 203. Help for Default Radio Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of radio buttons when created using the
Control Radio Button menu item, the Radio Buttons notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles, text and size of
radio buttons when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows
you to preview the styles, text and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 204. Help for Default Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of frames when created using the Control
Frame menu item, the Defaults Frame notebook page are used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the frame
when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows you to preview
the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 205. Help for Default Rectangle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of rectangles when created using the
Control Rectangle menu item, the Defaults Rectangle notebook page are used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the
rectangle when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows you
to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 206. Help for Default Scroll Bars ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of horizontal scroll bars or vertical
scroll bars when created using the Control Horz. Scroll or Control Vert. Scroll
menu items, the Horz. Scroll Bar and Vert. Scroll Bar notebook pages are used.

Possible styles are:

     Thumb size
     Auto track
     Auto size

 The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the
 scroll bars when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows
 you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 207. Help for Default Spin Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of spin buttons when created using the
Control Spin button menu item, the Spin Button notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the spin
button when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows you to
preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 208. Help for Default Containers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of containers when created using the
Control Container menu item, the Containers notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the
container when you add them to a dialogue or window.  The notebook page also
allows you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 209. Help for Default Sliders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of sliders when created using the Control
Slider menu item, the Sliders notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the
slider when you add them to a dialogue or window.  The notebook page also
allows you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 210. Help for Default Value Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of value sets when created using the
Control Value Set menu item, the Value Sets notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the value
set when you add them to a dialogue or window.  The notebook page also allows
you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 211. Help for Default Notebooks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of notebooks when created using the
Control Notebook menu item, the Notebooks notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the
notebook when you add them to a dialogue or window.  The notebook page also
allows you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 212. Help for Default Spin Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of spin buttons when created using the
Control Spin button menu item, the Spin button notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the spin
button when you add them to a dialogue or window.  The notebook page also
allows you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 213. Help for Default Circular Sliders ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of circular sliders when created using
the Control Circular slider menu item, the Circular slider notebook page is
used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the
circular slider when you add them to a dialogue or window.  The notebook page
also allows you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 214. Help for Default Graphic Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of graphic buttons when created using the
Control Graphic button menu item, the Graphic button notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the
graphic button when you add them to a dialogue or window.  The notebook page
also allows you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 215. Help for Default Handwriting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of handwriting controls when created
using the Control Handwriting menu item, the Handwriting notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the
handwriting control when you add them to a dialogue or window.  The notebook
page also allows you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 216. Help for Default Sketch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of sketch controls when created using the
Control Sketch menu item, the Sketch notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles and size of the
sketch control when you add them to a dialogue or window.  The notebook page
also allows you to preview the styles and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 217. Help for Default Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To define the default characteristics of text when created using the Control
Text menu item, the Text notebook page is used.

The notebook page allows you to define the default styles, text and size of
text when you add them to a dialogue.  The notebook page also allows you to
preview the styles, text and size you enter for the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 218. Help for Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete dialogue allows you to delete items such as controls, resources and
menus.

Depending on the type of item you select from the Edit Delete menu, the items
will be displayed to allow you to select the ones you want to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 219. Help for Dialogue List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialogue List allows you to easily select dialogue ID's when associating a
dialogue with a sub-menu item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 220. Help for ID List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ID List allows you to easily select defined ID's for a control or resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 221. Help for Arrange ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To arrange the display order of controls or menus, select either the Arrange
Controls or Arrange Menus on the Options pull-down.

A dialogue will be displayed showing the current controls or menu items within
a list box.  You can then select items add move them to new positions,
effectively changing the arrangement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 222. Help for Window Definitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When creating a window, it is necessary to provide Prominare Designer with
certain Window Definitions.

To do this, click the mouse pointer on the Definitions push button in the
Window Styles dialogue.

A dialogue will be displayed in which you can enter the names for various
handles required within the program or you can have Prominare Designer do it
for you.

Note:  If you want Prominare Designer to generate the source code for the
       project you are working, you must do this through the Window
       Definitions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 223. Help for Window Styles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When creating a window or dialogue, it is necessary to select the basic styles
of the window or dialogue.

The Window Styles allows you to do this.  Depending on whether you are creating
a window or dialogue, various style options are available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 224. Help for Delete List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you select Verify on save in either the Define Design or New Design

The dialogue will allow you to prevent selected controls and resource in the
resource script and for constructs within the source code from being deleted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 225. Help for Procedure Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Procedure Messages dialogue is used to select messages to include within a
window or dialogue procedure.

Messages for the target operating environment are presented in the Procedure
Messages dialogue showing the messages already selected for inclusion within
the window or dialogue procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 226. Help for Note Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Note Entry dialogue is used to enter or edit a note that is to be
associated with the design.

The dialogue is presented as a notebook where you can select previously entered
note entries for editing or viewing.  You can also delete entries that are no
longer needed or add new ones.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 227. Help for Add Control Library ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add control library on the Options pull-down menu to add a custom
control dynamic-link library or to define a temporary control.

The dialogue that is displayed will allow you to state the type of control that
is being added, temporary, public or private and to enter the location where
the dynamic-link library is stored.

This will allow you to use and manipulate custom controls as you would see them
within the final application when you use the User define menu item in the
Control menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 228. Help for Edit Control Library ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Edit control library on the Options pull-down menu to edit a custom
control dynamic-link library location or to delete either a temporary control
or custom control dynamic-link library.

The dialogue that is displayed will allow you to state the type of control that
is being added, temporary, public or private and to enter the location where
the dynamic-link library is stored.

This will allow you to use and manipulate custom controls as you would see them
within the final application when you use the User define menu item in the
Control menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 229. Aligning Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Alignment dialogue is used to select the alignment type for the controls
selected for aligning.

You can align the selected controls either horizontally or vertically, with
equal spacing, same size and push button alignment.

The notebook within the dialogue provides the four different alignment types:

Depending on the alignment direction, the alignment options that can be
selected are:

      Alignment
      Spacing
      Size
      Push buttons

 The order that the alignment progresses is:

   1. Auto sizing
   2. Push buttons
   3. Alignment
   4. Size
   5. Spacing

 The Align push button is used to align the controls selected, whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to cancel the alignment process.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 230. Dialogue Unit Limits Selection Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialogue Unit Limits Selection dialogue allows you to select display
conversions to use when you select the Display limits tool bar button.  Using
these conversions, Prominare Designer can display the rectangles that a given
device would translate to for the controls within the window or dialogue.  This
allows you to effectively check the controls within a window or dialogue for
errant display clipping without having to display the window or dialogue on a
display of a given type and resolution.

You may have noticed that if you have designed a dialogue using a device with a
1024 x 768 resolution, that when you have run the final application on a system
only having a 640 x 480 resolution, that some of the controls have been clipped
such that not all of the information for the control is displayed.

Prominare Designer uses these conversion factors to convert the dialogue units
of the control being displayed to the pixel count of such that the rectangle
would be shown relative to the current control.

To select an entry, you first select the entry within the Device drop down list
and then select the Set push button.

To ignore the values selected, click the mouse pointer on the Cancel push
button.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 231. Help for System Icon ID List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The System Icon ID List is used to select a System Icon ID symbol and value for
association within an entry field ID Symbol and Value form where the ID List
was invoked.

When you have selected the ID symbol within the combination box, the ID symbol
and value will be displayed above the combination box.

Below the combination box, the actual system icon symbol will be displayed to
allow you to preview the actual icon before you include it within your
dialogue.

The Associate push button is used to associate the ID symbol for the invoking
dialogue.

The Cancel push button is used to cancel the association.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 232. Help for Product Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Product Information is broken up into three areas: program icon and name,
copyright notice, and information area.  The program icon and name displays the
program icon along with the full program name and version number.

Below the program icon and name is the program copyright notice.

The information area below the program copyright notice shows the number of
dialogues and windows within the current project being worked on.  Immediately
below this, the current date and time is displayed.

To exit the About Box, click the mouse pointer on the OK push button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 233. Help for Add Help Menu Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Add Help Menu dialogue is used to define the standard help menu ID symbols
and values.  By using this dialogue, Prominare Designer will automatically
create the Help Menu for you once you exit the Add Menu dialogue.  This
dialogue simplifies the process of creating the standard help menu which could
be created by individually creating each menu item by using the Control
Sub-Menu Item function.

Five groups make up the dialogue with each group corresponding to each
selectable menu item of the Help menu  This groups are:

     Help Index
     General help
     Using help
     Keys help
     Product information

 The first four groups contain two entry fields:ID symbol and value.  The last
 group for the About menu item, contains an additional entry field for the
 associated dialogue symbol.

 The Dialogue List push button is used to display a secondary dialogue
 containing a list of all dialogue boxes currently defined.  From that
 dialogue, you can select the ID symbol or value of the associated dialogue.
 The value selected will be automatically placed within the entry field.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not create the help menu.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 234. Help for Child System Menu Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Add Sys Menu dialogue is used to define the standard system menu ID symbols
and values.  By using this dialogue, Prominare Designer will automatically
create the System Menu for you once you exit the Add Menu dialogue.  This
dialogue simplifies the process of creating the standard help menu which could
be created by individually creating each menu item by using the Control
Sub-Menu Item function.

Six groups make up the dialogue with each group corresponding to each
selectable menu item of the System menu  This groups are:

     Restore
     Move
     Size
     Minimize
     Maximize
     Close

 Each of the groups contains an ID symbol drop-down box.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not create the help menu.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 235. Help for Define Design Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Define Design dialogue allows you to enter the project Basename, main( )
function filename, the Help filename and the Task List text.

The dialogue will automatically fill in the main( ) function filename for when
none has been entered.

Below these entry fields, further options are found.  Through the Environment
selections, you can select your target environment as either OS/2 or Windows.

In the Save group, you can also inform Prominare Designer to save both the
source and include files.

You specify through the Rules group the rules to use in the code generation
process.  Selecting the Use master option causes Prominare Designer to use the
master rules that are available to all projects.  By selecting the Use project,
Prominare Designer will use the rules that were set up specifically for the
project.

Deletion of resource script information and source code is controlled through
the Deletion group.  By selecting the None option, you instruct Prominare
Designer to not remove any constructs from either the resource script or source
code files for items that have been deleted from the design.  The Don't verify
will cause the deleted item constructs to be removed from both the resource
script and source code files without any verification whereas the Verify on
save will cause a list of deletion items to be displayed before the resource
script and source code files are saved to allow you to pre-edit the deletion
list thereby allowing you to prevent certain source code constructs from being
deleted.

Through the Language group, you can select the source code language that should
be used to produce the source code files.

Note:  Options that are not available for you particular setup of Prominare
       Designer will be disabled and you will not be able to select them.

 The Set push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not save the association information.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 236. Help for Build Help Sub-Table Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Build Help Sub-Table dialogue allows you to edit the Help Sub-Table created
using the Help Build Help Sub-Table on the Resource pull-down menu.

The dialogue contains a list box of the control ID symbols or values found
within the window or dialogue where interaction with the user is possible.
These controls can be:

     Action Bar Menu Item
     Sub-Menu Item
     Push Button
     Check Box
     Radio Button
     Ettry Field
     List Box
     Combo Box
     Multi-Line Entry
     Spin Button
     Container
     Slider
     Value Set
     Notebook
     User Button
     Circular slider
     Graphical button
     Handwriting
     Sketch

 At the top of the dialogue are entry fields for the sub-table ID symbol and
 value.

 There is also an entry field for the Sub-Item Size.  If you plan on using
 additional ID's within the sub-table, you should change the default value from
 2 to the number of items you wish to use in each sub-table item.

 Note:  The minimum number for Sub-Item Size is 2. Prominare Designer will
        automatically set the size to 2 if the value is less than 2.

 Below the list box are entry fields for each sub-table item.  You enter the ID
 symbol and value for each sub-table item selected in the list box in the
 Window ID and the Panel ID entry fields.

 If you have increased the sub-item size in the Sub-Item Size entry field, you
 can enter any additional values within the Other Values entry field.

 The Change push button is used to replace the values of the selected sub-table
 item in the list box with the values contain in the Window ID, Panel ID and
 Other Values entry fields.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not add the help sub-table to the window or dialogue.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 237. Help for Build Help Table Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Build Help Table dialogue allows you to edit the Help Table created using
the Help Build Help Table on the Resource pull-down menu.

The dialogue contains a list box of the sub-table ID symbols or values found
within the project.

At the top of the dialogue are entry fields for the table ID symbol and value.

Below the list box are entry fields for each table item.  You enter the ID
symbol and value for each table item selected in the list box in the Window ID,
Sub-Table ID and the Extended ID entry fields.

The Change push button is used to replace the values of the selected sub-table
item in the list box with the values contain in the Window ID, Sub-Table ID and
Extended ID entry fields.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
and to not add the help table to the window or dialogue.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 238. Help for Buttons Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Buttons Styles dialogue is used to set button types and styles.  It is also
used to set the button text, ID symbol and value.

Possible button types are:

     Push Button
     Check Box
     Auto Check Box
     Radio Button
     Auto Radio Button
     3 State
     Auto 3 State
     User Button

 You can select one of the button types or you can change from one button type
 to another.

 Button options that are possible are:

     Default
     Help
     SYSCOMMAND
     No Border
     No Focus
     No Pointer Select
     Checked
     Hilighted
     Icon
     Bitmap
     Auto size
     Text
     Mini-icon

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change push button.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 239. Help for Combo Box Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Combo Box Styles dialogue is used to set a combo box's style and to set the
default text, ID symbol and value.

Possible styles are:

     Simple
     Drop Down
     Drop Down List
 Other options are:

     Auto Tab
     Any
     SBCS
     DBCS
     Mixed
     Horz. Scroll

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the combo box.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 240. Help for List Box Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The List Box Styles dialogue is used to set a list box's style and to set the
ID symbol and value.

Possible styles are:

     Multiple Selection
     User Redraw
     No Adjust Position
     Horz. Scroll
     Ettended Selection

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the list box.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 241. Help for Multi-Line Entry Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Multi-Line Entry Styles dialogue is used to set a multi-line entry's style
and to set the default text, ID symbol and value.

Possible styles are:

     Border
     Horz. Scroll
     Vert. Scroll
     Ignore Tab
     Read Only
     Word Wrap
     Disable Undo

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the multi-line entry.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 242. Help for Scroll Bar Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Scroll Bar Styles dialogue is used to set a scroll bar's style and to set
the ID symbol and value.

Possible styles are:

     Thumb size
     Auto track
     Auto size
 The entry fields labeled Low range, High range, Visible, and Total are used in
 conjunction with the Thumb size option.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the scroll bar.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 243. Help for Statics Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Statics Styles dialogue is used to set statics types and styles.  It is
also used to set the static's text, ID symbol and value.

Possible static types are:

     Text
     Group Box
     Icon
     Bitmap
     Sys Icon
     Autosize
     Foreground Rect
     Halftone Rect
     Background Rect
     Foreground Frame
     Halftone Frame
     Background Frame

 You can select one of the static types or you can change from one static type
 to another.

 Text style options that are possible are:

     Left Aligned
     Horz. Aligned
     Right Aligned
     Top Aligned
     Vert. Centered
     Bottom Aligned
     Word Wrap
     Halftone
     Mnemonic
     Auto size

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the static control.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 244. Help for Spin Button Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 1.30 and above.  You will
       require the IBM OS/2 1.3 or the OS/2 2.00 Toolkit to be able to use this
       option.

 The Spin Button dialogue is used to set master and servants for spin buttons
 as well as selecting various display styles. It is also used to set the text,
 ID symbol and value.

 Possible types are:

     Master
     Servant

 You can cause the text within the spin field to be aligned in a specific way.

 Alignment options that are possible are:

     Left
     Centered
     Right

 General options that are possible are:

     All characters
     Numeric
     Read only
     No border
     Fast spin
     Zero pad

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the spin button.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 245. Help for Container Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above.  You will
       require the IBM OS/2 2.0 Toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Container dialogue is used to set the container selection type and other
 options. It is also used to set the ID symbol and value.

 Selection types are:

     Ettend
     Multiple
     Single

 General options that are possible are:

     Auto position
     Verify pointer
     Read only
     Mini record
     Mini-icons
     No control pointer

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the container.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 246. Help for Slider Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above.  You will
       require the IBM OS/2 2.0 Toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Slider dialogue is used to select the slider orientation, button placement
 and home position. It is also used to set the ID symbol and value.

 Orientation can be:

     Horizontal
     Vertical

 Shaft offset can be:

     Center
     Bottom
     Top
     Left
     Right

 Button placement can be:

     Bottom
     Top
     Left
     Right

 Home position can be:

     Bottom
     Top
     Left
     Right

 General options are:

     Snap to increment
     Owner draw
     Read only
     Ribbon strip

 Primary scale can be:

     Scale 1
     Scale 2

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the slider.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 247. Help for Value Set StylesDialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above.  You will
       require the IBM OS/2 2.0 Toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Value Set dialogue is used to display type for the value set and other
 general options. It is also used to set the ID symbol and value.

 Default items can be:

     Bitmap
     Icon
     Text
     Colour info
     Colour indices

 General options are:

     Border
     Item border
     scale bitmaps
     Right to left ordering

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the value set.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 248. Help for Notebook Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above.  You will
       require the IBM OS/2 2.0 Toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Notebook dialogue is used to notebook page orientation, tab type and
 binding. It is also used to set the ID symbol and value.

 Backpage orientation can be:

     Bottom right
     Bottom left
     Top right
     Top left

 Major tab side can be:

     Bottom
     Top
     Left
     Right

 Tab type can be:

     Square
     Rounded
     Polygon

 Text display options are:

     Left
     Center
     Right

 Binding options are:

     Spiral
     Solid

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the notebook.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 249. Help for Graphic Button Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above and requires the
       MMPM/2 toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Graphic Button Styles dialogue is used to set the display type and general
 options of the MMPM/2 graphic button. It is also used to set the text, ID
 symbol and value.

 Default items can be:

     2 state
     Auto 2 state
     Animation
     Auto animation
     Hilite bitmap
     Disable bitmap
     3D recessed text
     3D raised text

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the notebook.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 250. Help for Circular Slider Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above and requires the
       MMPM/2 toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Circular Slider Styles dialogue is used to set the display type and
 general options of the MMPM/2 circular slider. It is also used to set the
 text, ID symbol and value.

 Default items can be:

     Mid-point tick
     No value buttons
     No dial numbers
     No dial text
     Direct manipulation
     360┬░ scroll range
     Proportional ticks
     No ticks
     Circular value
 entry fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values
 entered and to not change the notebook.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 251. Help for Handwriting Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for Pen for OS/2 and requires the Pen for
       OS/2 toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Handwriting Styles dialogue is used to set the display type and general
 options of the Pen for OS/2 handwriting control. It is also used to set the
 text, ID symbol and value.

 Default items can be:

     Border
     3D border

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the notebook.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 252. Help for Sketch Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for Pen for OS/2 and requires the Pen for
       OS/2 toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Sketch Styles dialogue is used to set the display type and general options
 of the Pen for OS/2 sketch control. It is also used to set the text, ID symbol
 and value.

 Default items can be:

     Border
     3D border

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the notebook.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 253. Help for User Define Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The User Define dialogue is used to define a custom control commonly none as
User Defined Controls. control ID and value.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
and to not change the child window.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 254. Help for Window Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Window Styles dialogue is used to set child window styles. It is also used
to set the title bar text, window ID symbol and value along with the function
name and source file filename.

Possible styles are:

     Title Bar
     System Menu
     Horz. Scroll
     Vert. Scroll
     Visible
     Size Border
     Border
     Dialogue Frame
     System Modal
     Min Button
     Max Button
     Auto icon

 The Definitions push button is used to display a secondary dialogue containing
 entry fields for various handles that would be required by the window. the ID
 symbol or value that you wish to use as the ID for the menu item.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the child window.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 255. Help for Popup Menu Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Popup Menu dialogue is used to set the ID for a popup menu.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
and to not change the child window.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 256. Help for File Configure Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Configure is used to set the path where master source code generation
rules are to be stored.

This allows you to correct save changes to the source code rules.

The Set push button is used to accept the value entered within the entry field,
whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered and to not
change the default path.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 257. Help for Default Creation Options Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Creation Options dialogue is used to set the defaults when creating
a new window or dialogue.

The dialogue also allows you to set the default characteristics for the
following types of controls:

     Push Button
     Check Box
     Radio Button
     Horz. Scroll
     Vert. Scroll
     List Box
     Ettry Field
     Group Box
     Text
     Frame
     Rectangle
     Combo Box
     Multi-Line Entry
     Notebook
     Container
     Slider
     Value set
     Circular slider
     Graphic button
     Handwriting
     Sketch

 Note:  The Circular slider and Graphic button pages will only be displayed if
        MMPM/2 has been installed on your system.

 Note:  The Handwriting and Sketch pages will only be displayed if Pen for OS/2
        has been installed on your system.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the defaults.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 258. Help for Dialogue/Window Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialogue/Window notebook page is used to set the defaults when creating a
new window or dialogue.

For example, if you are creating dialogues most of time, and the dialogues you
create have a title bar along with a system menu, you can, through this
dialogue, set the defaults such that a dialogue containing a title bar and
system menu is created each time you use the New Window/Dialogue on the Edit
pull-down menu.

The basic window/dialogue default types that you can set are:

     Parent Window
     Child Window
     Dialogue

 The ID value display type that you can set are:

     Decimal
     Hex

 The basic positioning options that you can set are:

     Window
     Screen
     Mouse

 The basic styles for the window or dialogue that you can set are:

     Title Bar
     System Menu
     Horz Scroll Bar
     Vert Scroll Bar
     Visible
     Size Border
     Border
     Dialogue Frame
     System Modal
     Menu
     Min Button
     Max Button
     Hide Button
     Accelerators
     Standard
     Shell position
     Auto icon

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the defaults.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 259. Help for CUA Compliance Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CUA Compliance is used to set the CUA Compliance rules which Prominare
Designer will use to check windows, dialogues and controls for compliance.

By selecting a compliance rule, Prominare Designer will use the rule when
creating or editng a window, dialogue or control.

The following rules can be set:

     Action Bars
     Numbered menus
     Capitalization
     Mnemonic selection
     Ordering
     Double-words
     Pull-downs
     Numbered menus
     Capitalization
     Mnemonic selection
     Dialogues
     System Menu
     Controls
     Push Button ellipsis
     Capitalization
     Mnemonic selection

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values rules selected whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to reject the any selections made and to not change
 the current rules.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 260. Help for Delete Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete dialogue is used to select items to delete from the current window
or dialogue.

Depending on the menu item selected from the Delete on the Edit pull-down menu,
the dialogue will display within the list box the ID's and types.

You can then select the item or items to delete by clicking the mouse on the
item(s) within the list box.

Above the list box, an information area will display the number of items
selected.

The Delete push button is used to delete the selected items within the list
box, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to cancel the delete request.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 261. Help for Design Errors Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Design Errors dialogue will allow you to see exactly areas within your
design that are problems with regards to resources.  These problems can be as
simple as a file missing, like that of an icon, or as severe as two resources
having the same ID value.

The dialogue consists of a list box and display fields.  Within the list box
will be the errors detected.  When you select an item within the list box the
display fields will display information regarding the error.  From this
information, you will be able to make the correction.

The dialogue is modeless in nature thereby allowing you to correct multiple
errors with the list remaining visible.  When you click the mouse pointer on
the Exit push button, the dialogue will be hidden from view and you will have
to double click button 2 of the mouse on the Scan errors tool bar button a
subsequent time to see if any errors remain.

The dialogue will also be displayed if you have depressed the Scan errors tool
bar button and you are saving your design to disk.  Any errors detected will be
displayed within the dialogue and the .RC or .RES file will not be saved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 262. Design Notes Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You enter design notes through the Design Notes dialogue. You can enter the
note title, author and note entry through the entry fields provided in the
notebook page.

To add a new note entry, you only need to simply click the mouse pointer on the
Add push button.  This will cause a new notebook page to be added to the
notebook.  You can then enter in the necessary information within this new
page.

Deleting a note entry only involves selecting the notebook page that contains
the entry and then clicking the mouse pointer on the Delete push button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 263. Help for Dialogue List Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialogue List is used to select a dialogue ID symbol or value for
association within a dialogue where the Dialogue List was invoked.

When you have selected the dialogue within the list box, the dialogue ID symbol
and value will be displayed above the list box.

The Associate push button is used to associate the dialogue for the invoking
dialogue.  Alternately, you can double click the mouse on the desired entry
within the list box to cause the association to be made.

The Cancel push button is used to cancel the association.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 264. Help for Resource Distribution Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Resource Distribution dialogue is used to select the location where .RC or
.RES that is to contain the the window or dialogue or dialogue you are
designing is to be placed.

The dialogue contains a notebook which if you are designing a window will
contain four pages: Window, Menu, Accelerator table and Help tables.

If you are designing a dialogue it will contain two pages: Window and Help
tables.

The current distribution path will be displayed above the list box within the
notebook pages.  You can change the path by selecting an entry within the list
box.

You can instantly define the path or location where the .RC or .RES file is to
be located by simply clicking the mouse pointer on the Definitions... push
button to display the Resource Distribution Definition dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 265. .RC Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The .RC/.RES notebook page is used to enter the name and location for both .RC
and .RES files.  Through the entry field labeled .RC you can enter the name and
location for the resource script file.  The entry field labeled .RES is used
for the name and location of the .RES file when such a file is produced through
Prominare Designer.

You need to complete both of the entry fields before you click the mouse
pointer on the Add push button.

To change an entry, you can select the item from the list box and then make the
changes within the entry fields before clicking the mouse pointer on the Change
push button.

You can delete an entry by selecting the desired item within the list box and
then click athe mouse pointer on the Delete push button.

The values that you enter can then be selected through the Resource
Distribution dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 266. Tables Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Tables notebook page is used to enter the name and location for both .RC
and .RES files for the association, message and string table resource files.
Through the entry fields labeled .RC you can enter the name and location for
the resource script file.  The entry fields labeled .RES is used for the name
and location of the .RES file when such a file is produced through Prominare
Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 267. Distribution Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Distribution notebook page is used to enter the name and location for both
.RC and .RES files.  Through the entry field labeled .RC you can enter the name
and location for the resource script file.  The entry field labeled .RES is
used for the name and location of the .RES file when such a file is produced
through Prominare Designer.

You need to complete both of the entry fields before you click the mouse
pointer on the Add push button.

To change an entry, you can select the item from the list box and then make the
changes within the entry fields before clicking the mouse pointer on the Change
push button.

You can delete an entry by selecting the desired item within the list box and
then click athe mouse pointer on the Delete push button.

The values that you enter can then be selected through the Resource
Distribution dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 268. Help for Edit Accelerator Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Accelerator dialogue is used to define, edit and delete accelerators
defined within the window you are current designing.

The dialogue will display display three list boxes.  The left list box contains
the defined accelerators.  The center list box contains a list of valid
accelerator keys.  The right list box contains a list of ID's used within the
current project.

When you select a defined accelerator ID from the left list box, the ID and
value entry fields will be completed at the bottom of the dialogue. Also, the
key options for the defined acclerator will be set.

The key options that are possible:

     Virtual Key
     Scan Code
     Char
     Help
     Alt
     Ctrl
     Shift
     SYSCOMMAND

 You can select a different accelerator key from the middle list box and/or you
 can select another ID value from the right list box.

 You can also change the key options as required.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not create the help menu.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 269. Help for Association Table Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Association Table dialogue allows you to edit or define association
information for the application or DLL you are designing.

You can enter the association name, extension and icon file through the entry
fields provided within the dialogue.  You can also define the usage of
associated icons through the options:

      Default owner
      Unchangeable
      Reuse icon

 To add an item within the association table, you need to complete the areas of
 the entry fields that are applicable for the association item and then click
 the mouse pointer on the Add push button.  To edit an item, simply click the
 mouse pointer on the item you wish to edit within the list box below the entry
 fields.  The values for the item selected will be placed within the entry
 fields after which you can change the values before clicking the mouse pointer
 on the Change button.

 To delete an entry within the list box, simply click the mouse pointer on the
 item within the list and then click the mouse pointer on the Delete push
 button.

 The Save push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 270. Help for Resource Table Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Resource Table dialogue allows you to enter, edit or delete a resource
definition for character tables, font directories, key tables and virtual key
tables. The type will have been determined through the menu you used before the
dialogue was invoked.

You need to enter or select a file that contains the table information, the ID
and value.

You can define the memory options for the resource through the Options group.
These include:

     Default
     Moveable
     Preload
     Discard

 You can add the item to the table list by simply clicking the mouse pointer on
 the Add push button.  If you are editing an item that you have selected from
 the list box, you can have the changes recorded by clicking the mouse pointer
 on the Change push button.  Finally, if you want to delete a defined entry,
 simply select the item from the list box and click the mouse pointer on the
 Delete push button.

 The Save push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 271. Help for Bitamp, Font, Icon and Pointer Resources Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bitamp, Font, Icon and Pointer Resources dialogue allows you to define,
edit and delete a bitmap, font, icon or pointer definition.

You define the resource you wish to enter through the Type group box.  It
contains the following options:

      Bitmap
      Default icon
      Font
      Icon
      Pointer

 You can define the memory options for the resource through the Options group.
 These include:

     Default
     Moveable
     Preload
     Discard

 To edit an item listed within the listbox, select the item which will cause
 the entry fields to display the defined information for the resource.

 The type group box will set the appropriate radio button for the type of
 resource selected.  You can select a different radio button if you want to
 change the type.

 Two list boxes allow you to locate the resource on your hard disk.  When you
 select a file from the list box, the Filename entry field will be completed
 with the filename for the resource selected.

 You can change the ID symbol and value within the entry fields along with the
 filename of the resource.

 The Save push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 272. Help for Edit Help Table Item Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Help Table Item dialogue allows you to define, edit and delete the
Help Table Items for the window or dialogue.

The dialogue contains two list boxes.  The first list box contains a list of
help tables defined for the window or dialogue.  The second list box contains a
list of help table items defined.

Below the list boxes are entry fields for each table item.  When you select a
help table item, the values for that item will be displayed within the entry
fields.

You enter the ID symbol and value for each table item selected in the list box
in the Window ID, Sub-Table ID and the Extended ID entry fields.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 273. Help for PMCX/Temporary Control Definition Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The PMCX/Temporary Control Definition dialogue is used to edit the location of
a PMCX control contained in a dynamic-link library or to the delete the
availability of a temporary or PMCX control.

The list boxes allow you to select the location where the dynamic-link library
for the control that you will define.

You must designate the type of control you are defining.  Two radio buttons
allow the following options:

     Private
     Temporary

 When you select the temporary option, you can define a temporary control where
 the name you enter is used as the classname for the control.

 The Add push button is used to add the control, whereas, the Change push
 button is used to change the value of the custom user defined control.

 The Delete push button is used to delete the temporary or custom control from
 use within Prominare Designer.

 Note:  It does not delete the custom control dynamic-link library from your
        system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 274. Help for Edit Custom Resource Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Custom Resource dialogue is used to define, edit or delete previously
entered custom resource definitions.

The dialogue displays a list of custom resources defined within the window or
dialogue you are designing.

When you select an item contained within the list box, the entry fields will be
completed with the information for that resource.

You can then change the Resource Type ID, ID symbol or Value.

The filename of the resource can be changed within the Filename entry field.

Two list boxes allow you to locate the resource on your hard disk.  When you
select a file from the list box, the Filename entry field will be completed
with the filename for the resource selected.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 275. Help for Search Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Search dialogue is used to search for an ID symbol or text within the
dialogues or windows within your design.

The dialogue provides a multiple-line entry field in which you can enter the
text to search for labeled Text and an entry field labeled Symbol in which you
can enter the symbol to search for.

Note:  You can only search for text or a symbol not both.

 If you selected Case sensitive check box, the search will ensure that matches
 will be exact in case whereas when you don't have the check box selected, any
 matches in the letters will be permitted.

 The Search help tables check box can be used to have the search performed
 through help tables as well.  This can be useful when search for an ID symbol.

 When a match occurs, the dialogue or window that contains the match will be
 displayed and the control that the match occurred in will be selected. If the
 match occurs within a menu or accelerator table, the window or dialogue will
 still be displayed, but a message box will also be displayed denoting that the
 match occurred within the menu or accelerator table.

 When a match occurs within a help table or sub-table,the window or dialogue
 will still be displayed, but a message box will also be displayed denoting
 that the match occurred within the help table or sub-table.

 When you have entered the text or symbol to search for, you can then click the
 mouse pointer on the Search push button.  To cancel the search request, simply
 click the mouse pointer on the Cancel push button.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 276. Help for Edit String Resource Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit String Resource dialogue is used to edit previously entered messages
and strings within a window or dialogue.

The dialogue displays a list of messages and strings defined within the window
or dialogue you are designing.

When you select an item contained within the list box, the entry fields will be
completed with the information for that resource.

You can then change the Text, ID symbol or Value.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 277. Help for Entry Field Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Entry Styles dialogue is used to set an entry field's style and to set the
default text, ID symbol and value and the input size.

Possible styles are:

     Left Aligned
     Centered
     Right Aligned
     Auto Horz. Scroll
     Margin
     Auto Tab
     Read Only
     Command
     Unreadable
     Any
     SBCS
     DBCS
     Mixed
     Auto size

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the entry field.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 278. Help for Edit Paste File Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Paste File dialogue is used to select the items from a selected design
file that are to be pasted into the current design that you are working on.

The notebook within the dialogue contains four pages:

     Dialogues/Window
     Resources
     Strings/Messages
     Association Table

 You select the items you wish to paste into the current design from the items
 listed on each page.  You can select more than one item in each list.

 The Paste push button is used to paste the items selected within the lists
 into the current design, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the
 values entered and to not change the default path.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 279. Help for Edit Help Subtable Item Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Help Sub-Table dialogue allows you to edit a Help Sub-Table contained
within the current window or dialogue you are designing.

Two list boxes are displayed.  The first one contains a list of Help Sub-Tables
defined within the window or dialogue.  The second list box contains the actual
Help Sub-Table Items defined.

Below the list boxes are entry fields for each sub-table item.  You enter the
ID symbol and value for each sub-table item selected in the list box in the
Window ID and the Panel ID entry fields.

If you have increased the sub-item size in the Sub-Item Size entry field, you
can enter any additional values within the Other Values entry field.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
and to not change the help sub-table.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 280. Help for Edit Help Sub-Table Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Help Sub-Table dialogue allows you to edit a Help Sub-Table defined
within the window or dialogue you are currently designing.

A list will be displayed containing sub-tables defined within the window or
dialogue you are working with.

After selecting an item within the list box, the entry fields will be completed
with the sub-table information from which you can edit.

The entry fields are:

     Table ID
     Sub-Item Size

 Note:  The minimum number for Sub-Item Size is 2. Prominare Designer will
        automatically set the size to 2 if the value is less than 2.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the help sub-table item.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 281. Help for Edit Help Table Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Help Table dialogue allows you to edit a Help Table defined within the
window or dialogue you are currently designing.

A list will be displayed containing tables defined within the window or
dialogue you are working with.

After selecting an item within the list box, the entry fields will be completed
with the sub-table information from which you can edit.

The field is:

     Table ID

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the help table item.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 282. Help for Display Units Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Units dialogue allows you to define and edit display conversions.
Using these conversions, Prominare Designer can display the rectangles that a
given device would translate to for the controls within the window or dialogue.
This allows you to effectively check the controls within a window or dialogue
for errant display clipping without having to display the window or dialogue on
a display of a given type and resolution.

You may have noticed that if you have designed a dialogue using a device with a
1024 x 768 resolution, that when you have run the final application on a system
only having a 640 x 480 resolution, that some of the controls have been clipped
such that not all of the information for the control is displayed.

This dialogue allows you to register as many different devices that you have
knowledge of along with their different display characteristics and the base
conversion values.

Prominare Designer uses these conversion factors to convert the dialogue units
of the control being displayed to the pixel count of such that the rectangle
would be shown relative to the current control.

To add a new entry to the list provided, simply enter the name of the device
(it must be unique otherwise an existing entry will be selected), and press the
Enter key.  You will be notified through a message box that you are adding a
new entry.  Clicking the mouse pointer on the Yes push button will cause the
new entry to be added, conversely, clicking the mouse pointer on the No push
button will cause the name entered to be discarded.

After the previous values within the entry fields have been cleared, you can
enter the values for the device.  The utility DFM.Exe is provided for you to
determine the specific factor for a given display type and resolution.  This
utility is found within your PDS30 subdirectory and can be run from any OS/2
2.x compatible system.  It will display the current resolution, colours and
factors within a small message window. You use the factors displayed within the
window within this dialogue.

You can determine easily the values for the device you are currently using by
simply clicking the mouse pointer on the Defaults push button.  The values for
the current display will be entered into the entry fields for you.

To delete an entry, you first select the entry within the Device drop down list
and then click the mouse pointer on the Delete push button.

To save the values entered or changed, click the mouse pointer on the Save push
button.  To ignore the values entered or changed, click the mouse pointer on
the Cancel push button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 283. Help for Resource Distribution Definition Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Resource Distribution Definition dialogue allows you to define the location
and filenames for the .RC and .RES files that you can use to save various items
of your design under.

Since Prominare Designer allows for distributed resources, you can have the
dialogues of the design placed within one directory and the help files within
another.

The Resource Distribution Definition dialogue consists of a notebook containing
two pages: .RC/.RES and Tables.

Through the .RC/.RES page you can define the resource script file location and
name along with the .RES file location and name that can be selected through
the Distribution dialogue for dialogues, menu and accelerator tables, and help
tables.

The Tables page is used to define the the filename and locations for the .RC
and .RES files for the association, message and string tables.

Through the Locate... push button, you locate a .RC or .RES file to use within
an entry field.  If you are within an entry filed intended for a .RC file, the
Locate dialogue will allow you to locate .RC files within your system.

Conversely, if you are within an entry field intended for a .RES file, the
Locate dialogue will allow you to locate .RES files within your system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 284. Help for Open Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Open dialogue allows you to open a .PDF file for editing within Prominare
Designer.

Two list boxes are found within the dialogue: one for the drive/directory list
and one for files.

You can select a different drive or subdirectory by double clicking the mouse
pointer on the entry desired.

To select the file to open. double click on the desired file within the files
list box or enter the filename within the entry field at the top of the
dialogue.

The Open push button is used to open the file listed within the entry field,
whereas, the Cancel push button is used to cancel the values the open request.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 285. Help for Paste Open Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Paste Open dialogue allows you to open a .PDF file to select elements that
will be pasted into the current design that you are working on within Prominare
Designer.

Two list boxes are found within the dialogue: one for the drive/directory list
and one for files.

You can select a different drive or subdirectory by double clicking the mouse
pointer on the entry desired.

To select the file to open. double click on the desired file within the files
list box or enter the filename within the entry field at the top of the
dialogue.

The Open push button is used to open the file listed within the entry field,
whereas, the Cancel push button is used to cancel the values the open request.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 286. Help for Import Open Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Import Open dialogue allows you to import an OS/2 or Windows 3.1 .RES file
for editing within Prominare Designer.

Two list boxes are found within the dialogue: one for the drive/directory list
and one for files.

You can select a different drive or subdirectory by double clicking the mouse
pointer on the entry desired.

To select the file to open. double click on the desired file within the files
list box or enter the filename within the entry field at the top of the
dialogue.

You need to select either the OS/2 or Windows 3.1 radio button before clicking
on the Open push button or double clicking the mouse pointer on the file within
the list box.

Note:  It is very important that you select the correct radio for the resource
       file type you are trying to import since the formats are very similar
       but slightly different in some areas.  This may cause importing
       problems.

 The Open push button is used to open the file listed within the entry field,
 whereas, the Cancel push button is used to cancel the values the open request.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 287. Help for File Merge Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Merge dialogue allows you to open a .PDF file for merging within the
current design.

Two list boxes are found within the dialogue: one for the drive/directory list
and one for files.

You can select a different drive or subdirectory by double clicking the mouse
pointer on the entry desired.

To select the file to open. double click on the desired file within the files
list box or enter the filename within the entry field at the top of the
dialogue.

The Open push button is used to open the file listed within the entry field,
whereas, the Cancel push button is used to cancel the values the open request.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 288. Help for Include Open Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Include Open dialogue allows you to open a .H file for used within
Prominare Designer.

Two list boxes are found within the dialogue: one for the drive/directory list
and one for files.

You can select a different drive or subdirectory by double clicking the mouse
pointer on the entry desired.

To select the file to open. double click on the desired file within the files
list box or enter the filename within the entry field at the top of the
dialogue.

The Open push button is used to open the file listed within the entry field,
whereas, the Cancel push button is used to cancel the values the open request.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 289. Help for File Save As Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Save As dialogue is used to save an untitled

The dialogue is also used to inform Prominare Designer of any additional files
that you would like saved.  These additional files are:

     Include File
     Source File(s)

 You can also save with the file Extended Attribute information such as
 History, Comments and Version.

 The Save push button is used to save the project and other files. whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to cancel the save request.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 290. Help for File Save Design Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Save Design dialogue allows you to save the window or dialogue
displayed as a pre-designed window or dialogue that can be selected through the
Pre-designed menu item in the Edit New window/dialogue pull-down menu.

A pre-designed window or dialogue is a single entity that when selected through
the Pre-designed menu item allows you to use the window or dialogue within the
design you are working on thereby preventing you from having to create the same
window or dialogue all over again.

You enter the name under which the window or design should be saved within the
pre-designed library.

The Enter push button is used to save the the window or dialogue, whereas, the
Cancel push button is used to cancel the save request.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 291. Help for Delete Pre-designed Window/Dialogue Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete Pre-designed Window/Dialogue dialogue allows you to delete a
pre-designed window or dialogue.

A pre-designed window or dialogue is a single entity that when selected through
the Pre-designed menu item allows you to use the window or dialogue within the
design you are working on thereby preventing you from having to create the same
window or dialogue all over again.

You enter select the windows or dialogues that you wish to delete from the list
box.

The Delete push button is used to delete the selections, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to cancel the delete request.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 292. Help for Print Design Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Print Design function is used to print the window or dialogue currently
being displayed.  The dialogue allows you to select the positioning of the
image on the final printed page.  You can orient it horizontally and
vertically.

You can also scale the image by entering the percent scale with 100% being a
full size image.

The Print push button is used to print the window or dialogue whereas, the
Cancel push button is used to cancel the print request.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 293. Help for Printer Setup dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Printer Setup dialogue allows you to select the output device to print to
and to if required, set options for the printing device.

A list of output devices will be displayed within a list box in the dialogue of
the devices you have installed through the system.

The currently selected device will be selected within the list and you can then
select a different device by clicking the mouse pointer on the required output
device.

To setup the selected device, click the mouse pointer on the Setup... push
button.  This will cause the setup dialogue for the selected output device to
be displayed thereby allowing you to tailor the output to your needs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 294. Help for Help Table Item Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help Table Item dialogue allows you to add a Help Table Item to the window
or dialogue you are designing.

A list box contains a list of Help Tables defined.  You have to select a table
to associate with the table item.

Below the list box are entry fields for each table item.

You enter the ID symbol and value for the table item in the Window ID,
Sub-Table ID and the Extended ID entry fields.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 295. Help for Help Sub-Table Item Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help Sub-Table dialogue allows you to define a Help Sub-Table Item for the
current window or dialogue you are designing.

A list box contains a list of Help Sub-Tables defined.  You have to select a
sub-table to associate with the sub-table item.

Below the list box are entry fields for each sub-table item.  You enter the ID
symbol and value for the sub-table item in the Window ID and the Panel ID entry
fields.

If you have increased the sub-item size in the Sub-Item Size, you can enter any
additional values within the Other Values entry field.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
and to not add the sub-table item to the help sub-table.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 296. Help for Help Sub-Table Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help Sub-Table dialogue allows you to add a Help Sub-Table to the window or
dialogue you are currently designing.

A list will be displayed containing Help Tables defined within the window or
dialogue you are working with.

After selecting an item within the list box, you can enter the sub-table item
within the edit fields.

Note:  You have to select a Help Table to associate with the sub-table item you
       are adding.

 The entry fields are:

     Table ID
     Sub-Item Size

 Note:  The minimum number for Sub-Item Size is 2. Prominare Designer will
        automatically set the size to 2 if the value is less than 2.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not add the help sub-table item.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 297. Help for Help Table Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help Table dialogue allows you to add a Help Table to the window or
dialogue you are currently designing.

The entry fields are:

     Table ID

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not add the help table.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 298. Help for Bitmap, Font, Icon and Pointer Resources Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bitmap, Font, Icon and Pointer Resources dialogue allows you to add a
bitmap, font, icon or pointer definition.

The type group box will be set to the appropriate radio button for the type of
resource selected through your initial menu choice.  You can select a different
radio button if you want to change the type.

Two list boxes allow you to locate the resource on your hard disk.  When you
select a file from the list box, the Filename entry field will be completed
with the filename for the resource selected.

You enter the ID symbol and value within the entry fields along with the
filename of the resource.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 299. Help for Prominare Designer Information Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Prominare Designer Information dialogue will display the total number of
windows and dialogues you currently have within your design. It will also show
the time that the design file was last edited.

Information for the current window or dialogue will be displayed and will show
the total number of controls, accelerators, action bar menus, sub-menus, help
tables, sub-tables, and table items.

The dialogue will also show the distribution for the various resource elements.
It will show the location and filename where the dialogue or window, menu,
accelerators and help tables resource elements will be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 300. Help for ID List Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ID List is used to select an ID symbol and value for association within an
entry field ID Symbol and Value form where the ID List was invoked.

When you have selected the ID symbol within the list box, the ID symbol and
value will be displayed above the list box.

The Associate push button is used to associate the ID symbol for the invoking
dialogue.  Alternately, you can double click the mouse on the desired entry
within the list box to cause the association to be made.

The Cancel push button is used to cancel the association.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 301. Help for System Icon ID List Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The System Icon ID List is used to select a System Icon ID symbol and value for
association within an entry field ID Symbol and Value form where the ID List
was invoked.

When you have selected the ID symbol within the combination box, the ID symbol
and value will be displayed above the combination box.

Below the combination box, the actual system icon symbol will be displayed to
allow you to preview the actual icon before you include it within your
dialogue.

The Associate push button is used to associate the ID symbol for the invoking
dialogue.

The Cancel push button is used to cancel the association.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 302. Help for Include Save As Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Include Save As dialogue is used to save an untitled

The Save push button is used to save the include file under the name entered,
whereas, the Cancel push button is used to cancel the save request.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 303. Help for Include View/Edit Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Include View/Edit dialogue allows you to edit include symbols and their ID
values.

A list box will display the ID symbols and values from which you can select
items to change or delete.

The Enter push button is used to accept the changes made, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject any changes made.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 304. Help for Locate Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Locate dialogue allows you to locate a specific .RC or .RES file that is to
be used within an entry field of the Resource Distribution Definition dialogue.

The dialogue contains two list boxes: Directories/Drives and Files.  Through
the Directories/Drives list box you can navigate to the location where the .RC
or .RES file is located.  The Files list box will show either .RC or .RES files
depending on the type of entry field the cursor was located in.

You can select the file to use simply by clicking the mouse pointer on the file
within the Files list box and then clicking the mouse pointer on the Select
push button or you can double click the mouse pointer on the entry within the
Files list box.

If you do not want to use a file selected in the Files list box, you can simply
click the mouse pointer on the Cancel push button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 305. Help for Locate Path Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Locate Path dialogue allows you to locate the path where the toolkit header
files are located either for OS/2 or Windows.  You need to specify the correct
location of these header files when trying to import a resource script file.
Within the headers are the symbols for the styles and classes that are used to
describe the controls.

The dialogue contains a list box: Directories/Drives.  Through this list box
you can navigate to the location where the toolkit header files are located.

You can select the path to use simply by clicking the mouse pointer on the file
within the list box and then clicking the mouse pointer on the Select push
button or you can double click the mouse pointer on the entry within the list
box.

If you do not want to use a file selected in the list box, you can simply click
the mouse pointer on the Cancel push button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 306. Help for Edit Menu Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Menu Styles dialogue is used to define, edit and delete action bar and
sub-menu items.

A list box will display the currently defined menu items from you can select
the item to edit.

You must set the menu type which can be one of the following:

     Action bar
     Sub-menu

 You must set the base style that the menu item should have.  The base styles
 available for action bar items are:

     Text
     Bitmap
     Child system menu

 If you select a base style of Bitmap, you must provide the necessary code in
 your program to load the bitmap from the program's resources and to set its
 size before assigning it to the action bar item.  If you do use Bitmap as the
 base style, you do not need to enter any text for the action bar item.

 You can also set other styles that the menu item should have.  The styles
 available are:

     Separator
     Break
     Break/Separator
     Button Separator
     Help
     SYSCOMMAND
     Static
     Sub-Menu
     SYSCOMMAND
     Static

 It is also possible set attributes that the sub-menu items should have.  The
 attributes available are:

     Checked
     Framed
     No Dismiss
     Disabled
     Hilighted

 You enter the text for the menu item along with the ID symbol and value.

 When entering the text for the menu item, it is possible to use the tilde (~)
 character and the tab (\t) designations.  You usually use the tab to force
 accelerator designations to the right of the menu.

 If you do enter an accelerator designation, the accelerator will be
 automatically placed within the accelerator table.

 When you add an item, the item will be added after the last item belonging to
 the parent selected.  You can then place the item in the correct position
 later using the Arrange menus in the Options menu.

 The Dialogue List push button is used to display a secondary dialogue
 containing a list of all dialogue boxes currently defined.  From that
 dialogue, you can select the ID symbol or value of the associated dialogue.
 The value selected will be automatically placed within the entry field.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not create the sub-menu item.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 307. Help for Messages Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Messages dialogue is used to select or de-select messages that are to be
included within a window or dialogue procedure.

Depending on the defaults that you selected through the Rules Layout menu,
messages will have been preselected for inclusion within the window or
dialogue.

You can then select the messages that you wish to include within the window or
dialogue from the messages contained within the list and the code you have
defined for these messages will be included within your window or dialogue that
you are designing.

The messages within the displayed list will be for windows:

     WM_*
     DM_*
     HM_*

 The messages within the displayed list will be for dialogues:

     WM_*
     DM_*

 The dialogue will display the total number of messages contained within the
 list and will show also the total number of messages that you have selected.
 Each message that you selected to be included is highlighted within the
 message list.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not create the sub-menu item.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 308. Help for PMCX Creation Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The PMCX Creation dialogue is used to define the name of the custom control,
the author, the classname and description.

It is also used to define the amount of text the control can handle, which is
between 0 and 512 bytes.

The default size of the control is also defined and can be between 0 and
32,767.

When CTLDATA is defined for the control, you need to specify the size of the
control data that needs to be reserved for the control use.  This can be
between 0 and 65,535 bytes.

You can define various styles for custom control.  These are:

     Refresh
     Variable CTLDATA
     Allows style changing
     Tabable
     Help selectable


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 309. Help for New Design Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The New Design dialogue allows you to enter the design Basename, main( )
function filename, the Help filename and the Window list text through notebook
pages.

The dialogue will automatically fill in the main( ) function filename for when
none has been entered.

Below these entry fields, further options are found.  Through the Environment
selections, you can select your target environment as either OS/2 or Windows.

In the Save group, you can also inform Prominare Designer to save both the
source and include files.

You specify through the Rules group the rules to use in the code generation
process.  Selecting the Use master option causes Prominare Designer to use the
master rules that are available to all projects.  By selecting the Use project,
Prominare Designer will use the rules that were set up specifically for the
project.

Deletion of resource script information and source code is controlled through
the Deletion group.  By selecting the None option, you instruct Prominare
Designer to not remove any constructs from either the resource script or source
code files for items that have been deleted from the design.  The Don't verify
will cause the deleted item constructs to be removed from both the resource
script and source code files without any verification whereas the Verify on
save will cause a list of deletion items to be displayed before the resource
script and source code files are saved to allow you to pre-edit the deletion
list thereby allowing you to prevent certain source code constructs from being
deleted.

Through the Language group, you can select the source code language that should
be used to produce the source code files.

Note:  Options that are not available for your particular setup of Prominare
       Designer will be disabled and you will not be able to select them.

 The Set push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not save the association information.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 310. Help for Arrange Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you want to change the display order of items, you can use this dialogue.

A list of items will be displayed within a list box in their current order.

To change the position of an item, you only need to select the item within the
list box.  The mouse pointer will change from an arrow shape to a bar shape.
This indicates that an item has been selected and can now be moved.

When you move the mouse pointer, you will notice that the arrow will change
values from an arrow to a bar as it moves over each item.  When the pointer is
in the top half of an item, it will be a bar whereas when it is in the bottom
half of an item, it will be an arrow.

Once you have moved to the new location and the pointer is a bar shape, you
only need to press button 1 of the mouse to cause the item to be moved.

If you want to change your selection, move to the new item, making sure the
mouse pointer is an arrow shape and click button 1.

When arranging controls, two push buttons will appear in the bottom right
corner of the dialogue.  These buttons are used to add and delete group markers
and tab stops.

Upon completion of arranging the items, click on the Accept push button.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 311. Help for Pre-designed Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Pre-designed dialogue allows you to select a pre-designed window or
dialogue to include within you current design.

The list box will display the descriptions of the windows or dialogues that
have been saved as pre-designed entities.

The Select push button is used to retrieve from disk the entry selected in the
list box, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to exit the dialogue without
selecting a pre-designed window or dialogue.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 312. Help for Properties Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Properties dialogue allows you to set the loading and memory properties for
a:

     Accelerator
     Dialogue
     Message
     String

 The properties can be a combination of:

     Default
     Moveable
     Preload
     Discard

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered and to not change the
 properties.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 313. Help for Custom Resource Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Custom Resource dialogue is used to define, edit or delete a custom
resource.

You enter the Resource Type ID, ID symbol or Value.

The filename of the resource is entered within the Filename entry field.

Two list boxes allow you to locate the resource on your hard disk.  When you
select a file from the list box, the Filename entry field will be completed
with the filename for the resource selected.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 314. Help for Select User Control Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Select User Control dialogue is used to select a custom control defined
within a dynamic-link library or to select a temporary control.

The list box will display the current definitions available and when you select
an item, the control will be displayed in the example area.

When you click the mouse pointer on the Select push button, the mouse cursor
will change from the arrow shape to the selection shape to allow you to select
the location where the control should be placed within the dialogue or window
you are designing.

Once you have placed the control, a dialogue will be displayed allowing you to
enter the ID symbol and value, enter the control's text and to set styles if
the control supports them.

The Select push button is used to accept the control selected, whereas, the
Cancel push button is used to cancel the creation of the custom user defined
control.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 315. Help for Resource Strings Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The String Resource dialogue is used to add a message or string to the window
or dialogue you are currently designing.

The message or string type will be initially determined by the menu you
selected.  You change change the type before you exit the dialogue.

You can enter the Text, ID Symbol or Value for the message or string you wish
to add.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 316. Help for Window Definitions Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Window Definitions dialogue is used to define various handles used within
the source code.

The handles that are entered through the dialogue are:

     Queue
     Frame
     Client
     Menu

 The first entry field in the dialogue, Base is used to enter the base name for
 the handles and class information.

 By entering the base name, you can click the mouse on the Update push button
 to update the handle names and class information.

 Alternately, if you have selected the User Define check box, you can manual
 enter the necessary handle and class information.

 Even if you have used the Update push button to create the names for you, you
 can still edit them as required.

 If you want to use a function instead of inline code within the Client Window
 Procedure, enter the name of the function along with the filename for the
 message you wish to provide the function for.

 Note:  If you do not provide the definition information and you want Prominare
        Designer to generate the source code for you, Prominare Designer will
        display a message box informing you that you are missing information
        and that it will not be able to generate the source code.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not create definition information for the window.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 317. Help for Workplace Window Definitions Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Workplace Window Definitions dialogue is used to define various definitions
used within the source code.

The handles that are entered through the dialogue are:

     Menu

 The first entry field in the dialogue, Base is used to enter the base name for
 the handles and class information.

 By entering the base name, you can click the mouse on the Update push button
 to update the handle names and class information.

 Alternately, if you have selected the User Define check box, you can manual
 enter the necessary handle and class information.

 Even if you have used the Update push button to create the names for you, you
 can still edit them as required.

 You enter information required for the Workplace instance variable and
 initialization function in the group labeled Workplace definitions.

 You enter the window class name and definition through the entry fields
 provided within the group labeled Window class information.

 Note:  If you do not provide the definition information and you want Prominare
        Designer to generate the source code for you, Prominare Designer will
        display a message box informing you that you are missing information
        and that it will not be able to generate the source code.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not create definition information for the window.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 318. Help for New Dialogue/Window Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The New Dialogue/Window dialogue is used to select the type of window or
dialogue that you want Prominare Designer to create for you.  You can selected
from one of nine types.  The first one: is used to create a dialogue with a
system menu, title bar and three push buttons within the dialogue aligned along
the bottom of the dialogue.  The first push button is OK, the second Cancel and
the last one is Help.

The second one: is similar to the first and is used to create a dialogue with a
system menu, title bar but this time the three push buttons within the dialogue
are aligned along the right side of the dialogue.  The first push button is OK,
the second Cancel and the last one is Help.

The third one: is used to create a dialogue with a system menu, title bar and
one push button labeled OK.

The fourth one: is used to create a dialogue with a system menu, title bar and
no push buttons.

The fifth one: is used to create a notebook page.  This option is only valid if
you have dialogues or windows within your current design that contain a
notebook control.  When you exit the New Dialogue/Window dialogue using the
Create push button, a secondary dialogue, Notebook Page Parent, will be
displayed where you will need to select the parent and notebook for which the
page is being created for.

The sixth one: is used to create a Workplace Settings page.  This option is
only valid if you have set the design for Workplace.

The seventh one: is used to create a popup menu.  Initially, the menu will be
invisible since it contains no menu entrys.  Once you create a menu item for it
through the Sub-menu in the Control menu option, the popup menu will be
displayed.

The eighth one: is used to select a predesigned window or dialogue.  When you
exit the New Dialogue/Window dialogue using the Create push button, a secondary
dialogue, Pre-designed library, will be displayed where you will need to the
desired window or dialogue.

The last one: is used to create a window with a system menu, title bar and
minimize and maximize buttons.

The Create push button is used to accept the selection thereby causing the
selected type of dialogue or window to be created after which the
Window/Dialogue Styles dialogue will be displayed to allow you to tailor the
final values for the dialogue or window.

The Cancel push button is used to ignore the type selected.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 319. Help for Notebook Page Parent Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Notebook Page Parent dialogue is used to select the dialogue or window that
contains the notebook for which you wish to create a notebook page for.

The first drop-down list contains the dialogues and windows within your design
that have a notebook control.  You need to select the dialogue or window that
contains the notebook first before you can select the actual notebook for which
the page is targeted.

The second drop-down list contains the notebooks that are contained within the
dialogue or window selected through the first drop-down list.  When you select
the notebook from this drop-down list, the notebook page will be sized for the
notebook thereby allowing you to correctly design the page.

The Use push button is used to accept the notebook and parent selected whereas
the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 320. Help for Window/Dialogue Styles Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Window/Dialogue Styles dialogue is used to set a window's or dialogue's
styles. It is also used to set the title bar text, window ID symbol and value
along with the function name, source file filename and window or dialogue
description.

You also set the type of window or dialogue being set.  These types are:

     Parent Window
     Child Window
     Dialogue
     Notebook page
     WP settings page
     PMCX window

 The relative position that the window or dialogue takes can be one of the
 following:

     Window
     Screen
     Mouse

 Note:  The relative positions are only available for Child Windows and
        Dialogues.

 The method drop down list is activated when you select Parent window or Child
 window within the Type drop down list.

 The method is used to define where the window is created using the appropriate
 creation method.  Valid methods are: following:

     None
     main( )
     WM_CREATE

 The parent window for the window or dialogue can be one of the following:

     Desktop
     Main Window
     Object Window

 When you have selected the Notebook page as the type, the drop down lists
 within the Notebook page linkage group become active.  You are expected to
 select the dialogue which contains a notebook from the drop down labeled
 Dialogue. The dialogue selected will then be scanned for notebook definitions
 and the symbols of these notebooks will be placed within the drop down labeled
 Notebook.

 Once you have selected the target notebook, the necessary information for that
 notebook such as the size, tab orientation, etc. will be used as base to allow
 you to design the contents of the notebook page.

 Possible styles are:

     Title Bar
     System Menu
     Horz. Scroll Bar
     Vert. Scroll Bar
     Visible
     Size Border
     Border
     Dialogue Frame
     System Modal
     Menu
     Min Button
     Max Button
     Accelerators
     Standard
     Shell position
     Auto icon

 The Definitions push button is used to display a secondary dialogue containing
 entry fields for various handles that would be required by the window. the ID
 symbol or value that you wish to use as the ID for the menu item.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the child window.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 321. Help for Delete List Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete List dialogue is used to edit the list of deleted items from the
current design that you are saving.  The items will be both deleted and renamed
items from the dialogues or windows you have created or edited.

The items will be shown within a list box in the dialogue with the ID value,
control type and applicable parent.  You select the items you wish to delete
from the list and press the Delete push button to cause the items selected to
be removed from the list and for the process of saving the design to disk to
begin.  Selecting the All push button will cause all the items within the list
box to be selected thereby allowing you to unselect items as required.

At the beginning of each entry within the dialogue, a letter will be shown
indicating the type of action performed on the object in question.  These
abbreviations are:

 Abbreviation:       Meaning:

 R                   Object renamed.

 D                   Object deleted.

 M                   Message deleted.

 To proceed with the saving the of the resource script file and the source
 code, click the mouse pointer on the Continue push button. To exit without
 saving the resource file or source files, click the mouse pointer on the
 Cancel push button

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 322. Help for Bidirectional Support Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bidirectional Support dialogue is used to change the bidirection
characteristics of controls within the dialogue or window you are currently
designing.

You can set the following window orientation:

     Left to right
     Right to left

 You can set the following text types:

     Visual
     Implicit

 The symmetric swapping types you can set are:

     Off
     On

 You can set the following text orientation:

     Left to right
     Right to left
     Contextual

 The word break types you can set are:

     Off
     On

 The numeric types you can set are:

     Nominal
     Pass through
     National
     Contextual

 You can set the character shape determination for:

     Display shaped
     Nominal
     Middle
     Isolated
     Save shapped
     Initial
     Final

 The Set push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
 push button is used to reject the values entered.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 323. Help for Font & Colours Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Font & Colours dialogue is used to change the presentation characteristics
of certain controls within the dialogue you are currently designing.

A notebook within the dialogue allows you to select the areas within a
dialogue, window, control or menu that can have the colours set.  The notebook
is divided into two pages: Dialogues and Controls.

You select the area you want to change by selecting the check box.  A set check
box will use the colour you have defined whereas a clear check box will use the
default characteristics.

Beside each check box item will be displayed a button showing the current
presentation parameter colour selected.  By clicking on the button, the colour
table will be displayed.

The colour table to the right of the check boxes allows you to select the
presentation parameter colour.  A frame will be displayed around the colour you
have selected.

You can also select the font to use within the control by selecting the font
from the Fonts list box and the font size from the Size list box.  When you
select a font or font size, an example of the selected font and size will be
displayed below the list boxes.

The Set push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 324. Dialogue Parameters Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialogues dialogue is used to change the presentation characteristics of
certain controls within the dialogue you are currently designing.

A set of check boxes allow you to set the colours for the following areas:

     Foreground
     Background
     Highlight Foreground
     Highlight Background
     Disabled Foreground
     Disabled Background
     Border
     Active colour (2.x only)
     Inactive colour (2.x only)
     Active text foreground (2.x only)
     Active text background (2.x only)
     Inactive text foreground (2.x only)
     Inactive text background (2.x only)
     Shadow (2.x only)
     Shadow text
     Shadow hilight foreground
     Shadow hilight background
     Icon text background


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 325. Menu Parameters Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Menu notebook page is used to change the presentation characteristics of
menu items within the window you are currently designing.

A set of check boxes allow you to set the colours for the following areas:

     Foreground
     Background
     Highlight Foreground
     Highlight Background
     Disabled Foreground
     Disabled Background


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 326. Help for Font Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Font dialogue is used to change the font characteristics of certain
controls within the dialogue you are currently designing.

You can select the font to use within the control by selecting the font from
the Fonts list box and the font size from the Size list box.  When you select a
font or font size, an example of the selected font and size will be displayed
below the list boxes.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 327. Help for Note Entry Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Note Entry dialogue is used to entry and edit note entries that you want to
include within the design.  The dialogue allows you to select existing entries,
which are denoted by the tabs within the notebook, or to create new ones.

A title for the note can be entered along with the author name.

To clear delete an entry, click the mouse pointer on the Delete push button.
This will cause the entry within the note book to be removed and the
information to be discarded.

Adding a new note entry is done by clicking the mouse pointer on the Add push
button.  This causes a new page to be added to the notebook and to have it
placed on top to allow you to enter the information.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 328. Help for Edit Windows Message Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Windows Message dialogue is used to select and edit the default code
for messages that will be received by a window and that can be included as the
default message handling for a window that you are designing.

You select the message to view or edit by select the message from the Message
combination box.  After selecting the message, the default code will be
displayed within the read-only multi-line entry field below the combination
box.

To edit the comments defined for the message, select the push button labeled
Comments....  The body of the message handling can be edited by selected the
push button labeled Body....

To clear the defined code for the message, select the Clear push button.

The default code for the message can be set by selecting the push button
labeled Defaults.  This will cause the defined source code to be:

                       /*                                               */
   case WM_* :
       breakshift op

The Save push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 329. Help for Edit Dialogues Message Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Dialogues Message dialogue is used to select and edit the default code
for messages that will be received by a dialogue and that can be included as
the default message handling for a dialogue that you are designing.

You select the message to view or edit by select the message from the Message
combination box.  After selecting the message, the default code will be
displayed within the read-only multi-line entry field below the combination
box.

To edit the comments defined for the message, select the push button labeled
Comments....  The body of the message handling can be edited by selected the
push button labeled Body....

To clear the defined code for the message, select the Clear push button.

The default code for the message can be set by selecting the push button
labeled Defaults.  This will cause the defined source code to be:

                       /*                                               */
   case WM_* :
       breakshift op

The Save push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 330. Help for Edit Notify Messages Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Notify Messages dialogue is used to select and edit the default code
for notification messages that will be received by a window or dialogue and
that can be included as the default message handling for a window or dialogue
that you are designing within the WM_CONTROL message.

You select the message to view or edit by select the message from the Message
combination box.  After selecting the message, the default code will be
displayed within the read-only multi-line entry field below the combination
box.

To edit the comments defined for the message, select the push button labeled
Comments....  The body of the message handling can be edited by selected the
push button labeled Body....

To clear the defined code for the message, select the Clear push button.

The default code for the message can be set by selecting the push button
labeled Defaults.  This will cause the defined source code to be:

                        /*                                              */
           case BN_CLICKED :
              switch ( SHORT1FROMMP(mp1) )
                   {
                   case <id>
                        breakshift op
                   }
              breakshift op

The Save push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 331. Help for Edit Source Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Source dialogue is used to edit the code of various areas, with the
area selected shown beside the Area label.

Generally, you enter or edit the default code for:

     Module start
     Header start
     Window declaration
     Dialogue declaration

 For the coding for a window declaration could be:

  #pragma subtitle("   Client Window - Client Window Procedure")
  #pragma page( )

  /* --- <pfnWndProc> --------------------------------------------------- */
  /*                                                                      */
  /*     This function is used to process the messages sent to the        */
  /*     applications client window.                                      */
  /*                                                                      */
  /*     Upon Entry:                                                      */
  /*                                                                      */
  /*     HWND   hWndshift op = Window Handle                                     */
  /*     ULONG  msgshift op  = PM Message                                        */
  /*     MPARAM mp1shift op  = Message Parameter 1                               */
  /*     MPARAM mp2shift op  = Message Parameter 2                               */
  /*                                                                      */
  /*     Upon Exit:                                                       */
  /*                                                                      */
  /*     <pfnWndProc> = Message Handling Result                           */
  /*                                                                      */
  /* -------------------------------------------------------------------- */

  MRESULT EXPENTRY <pfnWndProc>(HWND hWnd, ULONG msg, MPARAM mp1, MPARAM mp2)

  {
  <localvars>

  switch ( msg )
     {
     <statements>
                          /* Default message processing                   */
     default :
         return(<defwinproc>(hWnd, msg, mp1, mp2))shift op
     }
  return(0L)shift op
  }

 You can use the following macro symbols within a command definition:

     <-date->
     <-file->
     <localvars>
     <pfnDlgProc>
     <pfnWndProc>
     <statements>
     <defwinproc>

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 332. Help for Edit Command Definitions Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Command Definitions dialogue is used to select and edit the default
code for various invocation methods.

Generally, the methods that are available are:

     Nothing
     if ( WinDlgBox(...) )
     WinDlgBox(...)
     WinLoadDlg(...)
     WinCreateWindow(...)
     WinCreateStdWindow(...)
     DID_OK
     DID_CANCEL

 When you select a method, you enter how the method should be completed.  For
 example, the default source for the if ( WinDlgBox(...) ) could be:


      case <id> :
          if ( WinDlgBox(HWND_DESKTOP, <hwndFrame>, <pfnDlgProc>,
                         (HMODULE)NULL, <idDlg>, NULL) )
              {
              }
          breakshift op

 You can use the following macro symbols within a command definition:

     <id>
     <idActionBar>
     <idButton>
     <idDlg>
     <idMenu>
     <DID_OK>
     <DID_CANCEL>

 You enter local variables that are to be used by the definition in the
 multi-line entry field labeled Local variables.  The body of the command for
 the method is entered in the multi-line entry field labeled Body.

 The definition can be deleted by selecting the Clear pushbutton.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the
 Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 333. Help for Edit Text Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Text dialogue is used to edit the default code for the area selected.

The Save push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 334. Help for Edit Text Body Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Text Body dialogue is used to edit the default code for the messages
selected.  Through the multi-line entry field labeled Local variables you can
enter the local variables that are required by the message handling.

The actual message handling code is entered through the multi-line entry field
labeled Body source code.

The Save push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 335. Help for Edit Prologue Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Edit Prologue dialogue is used to select and edit the default code for
messages that will be received by a window and that can be included as the
default message handling for a window that you are designing.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 336. Help for Source Code Layout Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Source Code dialogue is used to select select messages that are to be used
as the default for each new window or dialogue created.

You select the message to include from the Message combination box.  You view
the messages selected in the Selected combination box.

The source code as it would appear within a source file the first time it was
created is displayed in the read-only multi-line entry field below the
combination boxes.

To add a message, select the message from the Message combination box and click
the Add push button.

To clear the messages selected thus far, click on the Clear push button.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered, whereas, the Cancel
push button is used to reject the values entered.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 337. DLL Error Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The message window is displaying error information regarding a .DLL that could
not be loaded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 338. Duplicate Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Through the Duplicate Filename dialogue, you can enter an alternate name for a
filename that is already being used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 339. Mouse Usage Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mouse Usage notebook page allows you to define how you want to use the
mouse when interacting with controls and windows within a displayed window or
dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 340. Text/ID Symbol Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Through the Text/ID Symbol dialogue, you can edit the text and the symbol for
the control, dialogue or window currently selected.  Once you have made your
changes to either the text or ID/Symbol, you can click the mouse pointer on the
Update push button to cause the information to be recorded for the control,
dialogue or window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 341. Include Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When importing a script file, you may be asked to enter the include path that
is to be searched when no include path has been defined through the Prominare
Designer Default Usage dialogue or found within the environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 342. Help for Symbol Generation Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Symbol Generation Options notebook page is used to set the prefix values
for control symbols and to set automatic symbol generation options and
duplicate checking.

Within the dialogue are various entry fields where you to set the prefix that
is to be used with a control symbol.  The following table shows the controls
that can have a prefix value defined and the default:

 Control:            Default:

 Push button         PB_

 Check box           CB_

 Radio button        RB_

 List box            LB_

 Entry field         EF_

 Group box           GB_

 Text                ST_

 Frame               FR_

 Rectangle           RC_

 Combo box           CX_

 Multi-line entry    MLE_

 Spin button         SPB_

 Container           CT_

 Slider              SLD_

 Value set           VS_

 Notebook            NB_

 Circular slider     CSLD_

 Graphic button      GRB_

 Handwriting         HW_

 Sketch              SK_

 User defined        UD_

 User button         UB_

 Window              WIN_

 Dialogue            DLG_

 Action bar          IDM_

 Sub-menu            IDM_

 Popup menu          PUM_

 Notebook page       NBKP_

 By selecting the Auto generate check box, Prominare Designer will generate a
 symbol for a control using the text of the control.  If you select the Use
 prefix, the prefix for define for the control will prefix the translated text.

 Also, to aid the prevention of duplicate ID symbols within the current window
 or dialogue, you can have Prominare Designer check each symbol. If a duplicate
 symbol is found, a message will be displayed alerting you.  By clicking the
 mouse pointer on the OK push button in the message, Prominare Designer will
 use the symbol defined whereas pressing the Cancel push button, you will be
 allow to change the symbol.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 343. Help for Default Check Box Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Check Box notebook page is used to set the default check box
characteristics for when a check box is created using the Check Box on the
Control pull-down menu.

The default text to be used along with the size of the check box when it is
initially created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

The following check box types can be used as the default:

     Check Box
     Auto Check Box
     3 State
     Auto 3 State

 Button options that are possible are:

     No Focus
     Auto size

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised check box, you
 can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default check box.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 344. Help for Default Combo Box Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Combo Box notebook page is used to set the default combo box
characteristics for when a combo box is created using the Combo Box on the
Control pull-down menu.

The default text to be used along with the size of the combo box when it is
initially created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

Possible styles are:

     Simple
     Drop Down
     Drop Down List
 Other options are:

     Auto Tab
     Any
     SBCS
     DBCS
     Mixed
     Horz. Scroll

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised combo box, you
 can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default combo box.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 345. Help for Default Entry Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Entry notebook page is used to set the default entry field
characteristics for when an entry field is created using the Edit on the
Control pull-down menu.

The default text to be used along with the size of the combo box when it is
initially created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

Possible styles are:

     Left Aligned
     Centered
     Right Aligned
     Auto Horz. Scroll
     Margin
     Auto Tab
     Read Only
     Command
     Unreadable
     Any
     SBCS
     DBCS
     Mixed
     Auto size

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised entry field,
 you can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your
 default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default entry field.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 346. Help for Default Group Box Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Group Box notebook page is used to set the default group box
characteristics for when a group box is created using the Group Box on the
Control pull-down menu.

The default text to be used along with the size of the group box when it is
initially created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

Possible styles are:

     Auto size

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised group box, you
 can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default group box.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 347. Help for Paths Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Paths notebook page is used to set the path where pre-designed windows or
dialogues are to be stored when you use the Save design menu item in the File
pull-down menu as well as where the rules files are located.

Additional entry fields are provided to allow you to define the location where
your OS/2 and Microsoft Windows headers are located for when you want to import
OS/2 and Microsoft Windows .RC files.  You would use these paths when you
dynamically set the INCLUDE= environment and the include path has not been
formally defined within your environment.

The Set push button is used to accept the value entered within the entry field,
whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered and to not
change the default path.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 348. Help for Default List Box Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default List Box notebook page is used to set the default list box
characteristics for when a list box is created using the List Box on the
Control pull-down menu.

The default text to be used along with the size of the list box when it is
initially created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

Possible styles are:

     Multiple Selection
     User Redraw
     No Adjust Position
     Horz. Scroll
     Ettended Selection

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised list box, you
 can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default list box.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 349. Help for Default Multi-Line Entry Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Multi-Line Entry notebook page is used to set the default
multi-line entry characteristics for when a multi-line entry is created using
the Multi-Line on the Control pull-down menu.

The default text to be used along with the size of the list box when it is
initially created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

Possible styles are:

     Border
     Horz. Scroll
     Vert. Scroll
     Ignore Tab
     Read Only
     Word Wrap
     Disable Undo

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised multi-line
 entry, you can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your
 default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default multi-line entry.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 350. Help for Default Push Button Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Push Button notebook page is used to set the default push button
characteristics for when a push button is created using the Push Button on the
Control pull-down menu.

The default text to be used along with the size of the psuh button when it is
initially created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

Button options that are possible are:

     Default
     Help
     SYSCOMMAND
     No Border
     No Focus
     Icon
     Auto size
     Text
     Mini-icon

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised push button,
 you can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your
 default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default push button.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 351. Help for Default Radio Button Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Radio Button notebook page is used to set the default radio button
characteristics for when a check box is created using the Radio Button on the
Control pull-down menu.

The default text to be used along with the size of the radio button when it is
initially created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

The following radio button types can be used as the default:

     Radio Button
     Auto Radio Button

 Button options that are possible are:

     No Focus
     No Pointer Select
     Auto size

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised radio button,
 you can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your
 default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default radio button.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 352. Help for Default Frame Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Frame dialogue is used to set the default frame characteristics for
when a rectangle or frame is created using the Frame on the Control pull-down
menu.

The default text along with the size of the frame when it is initially created
is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

The following styles can be used as the default:

     Foreground
     Halftone
     Background
     Auto size

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised frame, you can
 test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default rectangle or frame.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 353. Help for Default Rectangle Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Rectangle dialogue is used to set the default rectangle
characteristics for when a rectangle is created using the Rectangle on the
Control pull-down menu.

The default text along with the size of the rectangle when it is initially
created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

The following styles can be used as the default:

     Foreground
     Halftone
     Background
     Auto size

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised rectangle, you
 can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default rectangle or frame.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 354. Help for Default Scroll Bars Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Scroll Bar notebook page is used to set the default horizontal or
vertical scroll bar characteristics for when a horizontal or vertical scroll
bar is created using the Horz Scroll or Vert Scroll on the Control pull-down
menu.

The size of the scroll bar when it is initially created is entered in the entry
fields provided in the dialogue.

The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
Designer defaults.

The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised scroll bar, you
can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
and to not change the default scroll bar.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 355. Help for Default Horz. Scroll Bar Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Horz. Scroll Bar notebook page is used to set the default horizontal scroll
bar characteristics for when a horizontal scroll bar is created using the Horz
Scroll on the Control pull-down menu.

The size of the scroll bar when it is initially created is entered in the entry
fields provided in the dialogue.

The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
Designer defaults.

The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised scroll bar, you
can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
and to not change the default scroll bar.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 356. Help for Default Vert. Scroll Bar Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Vert. Scroll Bar notebook page is used to set the default vertical scroll
bar characteristics for when a vertical scroll bar is created using the Vert
Scroll on the Control pull-down menu.

The size of the scroll bar when it is initially created is entered in the entry
fields provided in the dialogue.

The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
Designer defaults.

The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised scroll bar, you
can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
and to not change the default scroll bar.

The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 357. Help for Default Text Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default Text notebook page is used to set the default static text
characteristics for when static text is created using the Text on the Control
pull-down menu.

The default text along with the size of the static text when it is initially
created is entered in the entry fields provided in the dialogue.

Text style options that are possible are:

     Left Aligned
     Horz. Aligned
     Right Aligned
     Top Aligned
     Vert. Centered
     Bottom Aligned
     Word Wrap
     Halftone
     Mnemonic
     Auto size

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised static text,
 you can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your
 default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default static text.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 358. Help for Default Container Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above.  You will
       require the IBM OS/2 2.0 Toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Default Container notebook page is used to set the selection type and
 general options. It is also used to set the ID symbol and value.

 Selection types are:

     Ettended
     Multiple
     Single

 General options that are possible are:

     Auto position
     Verify pointer
     Read only
     Mini record
     Mini-icons
     No control pointer

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised container, you
 can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default container.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 359. Help for Default Slider Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above.  You will
       require the IBM OS/2 2.0 Toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Default Slider notebook page is used to set the slider orientation,
 display offset, button placement and home position. It is also used to set the
 ID symbol and value.

 Orientation can be:

     Horizontal
     Vertical

 Shaft offset can be:

     Center
     Bottom
     Top
     Left
     Right

 Button placement can be:

     Bottom
     Top
     Left
     Right

 Home position can be:

     Bottom
     Top
     Left
     Right

 General options are:

     Snap to increment
     Owner draw
     Read only
     Ribbon strip

 Primary scale can be:

     Scale 1
     Scale 2

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised slider, you
 can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default slider.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 360. Help for Default Value Set Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above.  You will
       require the IBM OS/2 2.0 Toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Default Value Set notebook page is used to set the display type and
 general options of the value set. It is also used to set the ID symbol and
 value.

 Default items can be:

     Bitmap
     Icon
     Text
     Colour info
     Colour indices

 General options are:

     Border
     Item border
     scale bitmaps
     Right to left ordering

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised value set, you
 can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default value set.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 361. Help for Default Notebook Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above.  You will
       require the IBM OS/2 2.0 Toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Default Notebook notebook page is used to notebook backpage orientation,
 tab position, tab type and binding. It is also used to set the text, ID symbol
 and value.

 Backpage orientation can be:

     Bottom right
     Bottom left
     Top right
     Top left

 Major tab side can be:

     Bottom
     Top
     Left
     Right

 Tab type can be:

     Square
     Rounded
     Polygon

 Text display options are:

     Left
     Center
     Right

 Binding options are:

     Spiral
     Solid

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised notebook, you
 can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default notebook.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 362. Help for Default Graphic Button Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above and requires the
       MMPM/2 toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Default Graphic Button notebook page is used to set the display type and
 general options of the MMPM/2 graphic button. It is also used to set the ID
 symbol and value.

 Default items can be:

     2 state
     Auto 2 state
     Animation
     Auto animation
     Hilite bitmap
     Disable bitmap
     3D recessed text
     3D raised text

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised graphic
 button, you can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your
 default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default graphic button.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 363. Help for Default Circular Slider Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for OS/2 2.00 and above and requires the
       MMPM/2 toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Default Circular Slider notebook page is used to set the display type and
 general options of the circular slider. It is also used to set the ID symbol
 and value.

 Default items can be:

     Mid-point tick
     No value buttons
     No dial numbers
     No dial text
     Direct manipulation
     360┬░ scroll range
     Proportional ticks
     No ticks
     Circular value

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised circular
 slider, you can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as your
 default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default circular slider.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 364. Help for Default Handwriting Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for Pen for OS/2 and requires the Pen for
       OS/2 toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Default Handwriting notebook page is used to set the display type and
 general options of the handwriting control. It is also used to set the ID
 symbol and value.

 Default items can be:

     Border
     3D border

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised handwriting
 control, you can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as
 your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default handwriting control.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 365. Help for Default Sketch Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Note:  This control is only available for Pen for OS/2 and requires the Pen for
       OS/2 toolkit to be able to use this option.

 The Default Sketch notebook page is used to set the display type and general
 options of the sketch control. It is also used to set the ID symbol and value.

 Default items can be:

     Border
     3D border

 The Default push button is used to reset the values entered to the Prominare
 Designer defaults.

 The Show push button is used to display the selections made within the example
 area of the notebook page.  And once you have shown the revised sketch
 control, you can test its operation to see if this what you want to use as
 your default.

 The Enter push button is used to accept the values entered within the entry
 fields, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default sketch control.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 366. Help for Configure Options Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Options pages is used to set the auto sizing option where the target
display type is used to size the control.  For example, if you are working on a
system that is 1024 x 768, there will be a good chance that the controls you
are using will be clipped on a VGA (640 x 480) system if the limits to the
control are based on the text that is shown within the control.  By selecting
this option, the auto sizing within the alignment dialogue Sizing page will
target the font metrics of the target VGA instead of using the font metrics of
the 1024 x 768.  This will help to ensure that the control when displayed on
the VGA system is not clipped.

You can also specify the time frequency for the auto-saving of the design
information through the Frequency spin-field.

The display of the startup dialogue is specified through the Display initial
action dialogue check box.  By selecting this option, the Prominare Designer
Startup dialogue will be displayed.

The Radix group is used to set the display radix of the ID values.  The radix
can be either Decimal or Hexadecimal

The Clear entry fields group is used to set the manor in which the entry fields
within the following dialogues handled when an entry is added or changed.
These are:

     Accelerator Tables Resource
     String Resource
     Message Resource
     Bitmap, Font, Icon and Pointer Resource
     Custom Resource
     Eiit Help Table
     Eiit Help Sub-table
     Eiit Help Table Item
     Eiit Help Sub-table Item
     Association Table
     Resource Table
     Eiit Menu Styles

 To allow the the entry fields to be cleared after you have added an item,
 select the On add check box.  To allow the entry fields to be cleared after
 you have changed an item, select the On change check box.

 The Set push button is used to accept the value entered within the entry
 field, whereas, the Cancel push button is used to reject the values entered
 and to not change the default path.

 The Help push button is used to display this help information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 367. Help for Options Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Options page is used to the margins, control spacing, gride values and
the push button spacing as well as select the display radix for the status
window.

It also allows you to define how the entry fields should operate in dialogues
that allow you to edit or enter multiple items such menus, bitmaps, pointers.
etc.  You can specify that the entry fields be cleared on an add operation
and/or on a change operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 368. Help for Basenames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Basenames page allows you to enter the design Basename, Include and main( )
function filenames.

Once you have completed the Basename entry field and the Include and main( )
entry fields are empty, the associated names will be placed within them using
the value from the Basename entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 369. Help for Other ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Other page allows you to enter the project .IPF name filename, .Hlp name
filename and Window listtext.

You would only enter the help filename if you are going to allow your
application to utilize the OS/2 Help Manager through the associated help table
and sub-tables within your desgin along with the appropriate API calls.

The text that would appear within the Window list is entered through the Window
list entry field.  This will allow your application to be selected from the
OS/2 Window List.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 370. Help for Windows 3.1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Windows 3.1 page allows you to enter the directory where the code
generation output should be placed for your Windows 3.1 designs.  You can leave
the Base source directory entry field blank thereby indicating to Prominare
Designer that you want the source code generated to be placed within the
current directory.

The location can be a full path (ie. drive and directory names), or, it can be
relative to the current directory (ie. ..).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 371. Help for Windows NT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Windows NT page allows you to enter the directory where the code generation
output should be placed for your Windows NT designs.  You can leave the Base
source directory entry field blank thereby indicating to Prominare Designer
that you want the source code generated to be placed within the current
directory.

The location can be a full path (ie. drive and directory names), or, it can be
relative to the current directory (ie. ..).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 372. Help for OS/2 1.x ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 1.x page allows you to enter the directory where the code generation
output should be placed for your OS/2 1.x designs.  You can leave the Base
source directory entry field blank thereby indicating to Prominare Designer
that you want the source code generated to be placed within the current
directory.

The location can be a full path (ie. drive and directory names), or, it can be
relative to the current directory (ie. ..).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 373. Help for OS/2 2.x ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The OS/2 2.x page allows you to enter the directory where the code generation
output should be placed for your OS/2 2.x designs.  You can leave the Base
source directory entry field blank thereby indicating to Prominare Designer
that you want the source code generated to be placed within the current
directory.

The location can be a full path (ie. drive and directory names), or, it can be
relative to the current directory (ie. ..).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 374. Help for Index Colours ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Index colours notebook page contains the index colours that you can select
for use the colour of a selected presentation parameter.

The colours will be displayed within a 3 x 6 grid from which you can select the
desired colour.  The proper name of the colour will be displayed beside this
grid.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 375. Help for RGB Colours ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The RGB colours notebook page contains three spin buttons in which you can
enter the values that are to be used as the RGB colour along with a colour
circle that can also be used to select the desired colour from.

When you enter a value within one of the spin fields, the cross hair of the
colour circle will be moved to the corresponding location of the RGB colour.

Conversely, when you move the cross hair of the colour circle to the desired
colour, the spin fields will be updated to the value of the RGB colour
selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 376. Help for .RC/.RES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The .RC/.RES notebook page is used to enter the name and location for both .RC
and .RES files.  Through the entry field labeled .RC you can enter the name and
location for the resource script file.  The entry field labeled .RES is used
for the name and location of the .RES file when such a file is produced through
Prominare Designer.

You need to complete both of the entry fields before you click the mouse
pointer on the Add push button.

To change an entry, you can select the item from the list box and then make the
changes within the entry fields before clicking the mouse pointer on the Change
push button.

You can delete an entry by selecting the desired item within the list box and
then click athe mouse pointer on the Delete push button.

The values that you enter can then be selected through the Resource
Distribution dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 377. Search and Replace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Search and Replace dialogue allows you to enter text to search for within
the Search entry field and the replacement text within the Replace entry field
and when you click the mouse pointer on the Replace push button will search the
resource entry and replace the searched for text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 378. Help for Tables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Tables notebook page is used to enter the name and location for both .RC
and .RES files for the association, message and string table resource files.
Through the entry fields labeled .RC you can enter the name and location for
the resource script file.  The entry fields labeled .RES is used for the name
and location of the .RES file when such a file is produced through Prominare
Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 379. Help for Window/Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Window or Dialogue notebook page is used to select the location and
filename that the window or dialogue resource information should be placed
within.  Since Prominare Designer allows you to distribute the resources of the
design, you need to select the location and file under which this information
is to be placed.

The files and locations that the dialogue or window information can be placed
is contained within a list box.  You only need to select the desired file and
location within the list box by clicking the mouse pointer on the desired item.

The location and file will be displayed above the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 380. Help for Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Menu notebook page is used to select the location and filename that the
menu resource information should be placed within.  Since Prominare Designer
allows you to distribute the resources of the design, you need to select the
location and file under which this information is to be placed.

The files and locations that the menu information can be placed is contained
within a list box.  You only need to select the desired file and location
within the list box by clicking the mouse pointer on the desired item.

The location and file will be displayed above the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 381. Help for Accelerator Table ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Accelerator table notebook page is used to select the location and filename
that the accelerator resource information should be placed within.  Since
Prominare Designer allows you to distribute the resources of the design, you
need to select the location and file under which this information is to be
placed.

The files and locations that the accelerator information can be placed is
contained within a list box.  You only need to select the desired file and
location within the list box by clicking the mouse pointer on the desired item.

The location and file will be displayed above the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 382. Help for Help Tables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help tables notebook page is used to select the location and filename that
the help table resource information should be placed within.  Since Prominare
Designer allows you to distribute the resources of the design, you need to
select the location and file under which this information is to be placed.

The files and locations that the help table information can be placed is
contained within a list box.  You only need to select the desired file and
location within the list box by clicking the mouse pointer on the desired item.

The location and file will be displayed above the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 383. Help for Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Resource notebook page is used to select the location and filename that the
resource information should be placed within.  Since Prominare Designer allows
you to distribute the resources of the design, you need to select the location
and file under which this information is to be placed.

The files and locations that the resource information can be placed is
contained within a list box.  You only need to select the desired file and
location within the list box by clicking the mouse pointer on the desired item.

The location and file will be displayed above the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 384. Help for Alignment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Alignment notebook page is used to select the alignment type for the
controls within the group of controls selected.

For horizontal alignment, the first selection: indicates that you do not want
any horizontal alignment.

The second selection: indicates that you want the controls aligned left
justified.

The third selection: indicates that you want the controls aligned
centerjustified.

The last selection: indicates that you want the controls aligned right
justified.

For vertical alignment, the first selection: indicates that you do not want any
horizontal alignment.

The second selection: indicates that you want the controls aligned top
justified.

The third selection: indicates that you want the controls aligned
centerjustified.

The last selection: indicates that you want the controls aligned bottom
justified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 385. Help for Spacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Spacing notebook page is used to select the spacing type for the controls
within the group of controls selected.

The first selection: indicates that you do not want any special sizing for the
controls selected.

The second selection: indicates that you want the controls selected to be
spaced horizontally within the window or dialogue.  The controls will be
started from the margin specified on the left and spaced across from left to
right.

The last selection: indicates that you want the controls selected to be spaced
vertically within the window or dialogue.  The controls will be started from
the margin specified on the bottom and spaced across from bottom to top.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 386. Help for Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Size notebook page is used to select the method in which the selected group
of controls are automatically sized and/or equally sized.

The top row is used to indicate that you wish to have the selected controls
automatically sized for the text.  The button and text controls will be sized
such that the limits of the control are based on the visible text.

The first selection: indicates that you do not want any auto-sizing for the
controls selected.

The second selection: indicates that you want the controls selected to be
auto-sized.

The next row is used to indicate that you want the controls selected to be
sized based on the anchor control either vertically or horizontally.

The first selection: indicates that you do not want any special sizing for the
controls selected.

The second selection: indicates that you want the controls selected to be equal
in width.

The last selection: indicates that you want the controls selected to be equal
in height.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 387. Help for Push Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Push buttons notebook page is used to select the method in which push
buttons within the group selected are aligned and spaced within the dialogue or
window you are designing.

The first selection: indicates that you do not want any special push button
alignment for the push buttons that may be within the group of controls
selected.

The second selection: indicates that you want the push buttons that may be
within the group of controls selected aligned at the bottom of the dialogue or
window.

The last selection: indicates that you want the push buttons that may be within
the group of controls selected aligned at the right side of the dialogue or
window starting from the top of the dialogue or window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 388. Help for Dialogues/Windows Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialogues/Windows notebook page is used to select the dialogues and windows
that you wish to paste into the current design from the file selected.

Each of the dialogues and windows contained within the design file selected
will be shown within the list box.  Each item will contain the dialogue or
window description, ID and type.

You can select more that one item that is to be pasted into the design you are
working on.

Note:  Any ID conflicts of the dialogues or windows that are pasted into the
       current design will have new ID values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 389. Help for Resources Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Resources notebook page is used to select the resources that you wish to
paste into the current design from the file selected.

Each of the resources contained within the design file selected will be shown
within the list box.  Each item will contain the resource file, ID and type.

You can select more that one item that is to be pasted into the design you are
working on.

Note:  Any ID conflicts of the resources that are pasted into the current
       design will have new ID values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 390. Help for Strings/Messages Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Strings/Messages notebook page is used to select the strings and messages
that you wish to paste into the current design from the file selected.

Each of the strings and messages contained within the design file selected will
be shown within the list box.  Each item will contain the string or message
text, ID and type.

You can select more that one item that is to be pasted into the design you are
working on.

Note:  Any ID conflicts of the strings or messages that are pasted into the
       current design will have new ID values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 391. Help for Association Table Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Association Table notebook page is used to select the association table
items that you wish to paste into the current design from the file selected.

Each of the association table items contained within the design file selected
will be shown within the list box.  Each item will contain the association
name, extension and icon.

You can select more that one item that is to be pasted into the design you are
working on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 392. Help for Pen Options Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Pen Options dialogue allows you to set various pen options for controls
that support pen data.  These controls are:

      Entry field
      Multiple-line entry field
      Combo-box
      Spin button
      Handwriting control

 Note:  For the options to be available to you, you must be running Pen for
        OS/2 Version 1.1 or higher.

 You can set options for the following:

      Layouts/Resource
      Options
      Layouts/Resource
      Symbol Sets
      Include/Exclude Regions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 393. Help for Layouts/Resource Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Layouts/Resource notebook page allows you to specify the name of the DLL
that contains the pointer resources if these resources do not reside within the
executable.  You enter the name of the DLL within the entry field Name.

These pointers can be selected or entered through the ID fields labeled
Proximity and Writing.  The Proximity pointer is is used by the pen sub-system
when-ever the pointer is within the proximity of the control.  The Writing
pointer is used when-ever writing within the control is occurring.

You can specify the line layout width and spacing within the entry fields Width
and Spacing.  If you want to use the pen system defaults for these values, you
can simply click the mouse pointer on the Defaults check box.  You can also
select the colour that is to be used from the colour selections.

When you are selecting the pen options for the handwriting control, you can
specify the box layout instead of the line layout.  In this case, you can set
the box width and height through the entry fields Width and Height.  If you
want to use the pen system defaults for these values, you can simply click the
mouse pointer on the Defaults check box.  You can also select the colour that
is to be used from the colour selections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 394. Help for Options Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Through the Options notebook page, you can set the various options that are to
be used by the pen sub-system when pen is being used with the control.

For the trigger, you can set the following:

      Exit proximity

      Lift off

      Timeout

      Focus lost

 For the language modeling, you can set the following:

      Word case

      Sentence case

      Alphanumeric

      Punctuation

 For the recoginition form, you can select one of the following:

      Boxed

      Lined

      Unlined

 For the dictionary influence, you can select one of the following:

      None

      Advise

      Force

      Reject

 You can also for the dictionary influence, you can set the following:

      Case force

 For the symbol set, you can set the following:

      Full

      Lowercase

      Uppercase

      Digit

      Punctuation

      Special


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 395. Help for Inks Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Inks notebook page allows you to specify the type of inking that should
occur within the control.

The first two options determine how this page can be used.  If you select the
System option, you cannot select any options within the notebook page.
Conversely, if you select the Window option, you can select the options within
the notebook page.

The line width options are:

      Default

      Normal

      Thick

 The colour is selected from the colour set and the line type is selected from
 the line set.

 The mix that is used to draw the lines can be one of the following:

      Default

      Or

      Overpaint

      Leave alone

      Xor

      And

      Subtract

      Mask src not

      Zero

      Not merge src

      Not xor src

      Invert

      Merge src not

      Not copy src

      Merge not src

      Not mask src

      One


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 396. Help for Symbol Sets Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Through the Symbol sets notebook page you can select the symbol sets that the
pen sub-system is to use.  The upper set of symbols is the gesture set.  You
can select any combination of gestures to include within the symbol set.

Likewise, you can select any combination of the character symbols that are
found below the gestures.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 397. Help for Include/Exclude Regions Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Include/exclude regions notebook page is used to define the include region
along with the exlcude regions that the pen sub-system is to use.  The include
region by default is defined to be the entire display. You can define a smaller
area (in dialogue units) through the entry fields x, y, Width and Depth.

The exlcude regions are defined for the controls that can receive input from
the user.  Generally, you want to define the areas that should be excluded from
the input include region such that if the pen is moved to one of these areas,
that area receives the focus just like it would if you were using the mouse.

To define the controls that should be excluded, you select the items within the
list box.  You can select more than one control to exclude at a time by using
the list box extended selection techniques.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 398. Help for Parent Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When working with a design, there is usually one main window for the project.
This window is generally known as the Parent Window .

The Parent Window is in most cases a descendant of the Desktop but can also be
a descendant of an Object Window.

Generally, when the Parent Window is a descendant of the Desktop, the window
created can be shown and hidden at will whereas when it is a descendant of an
Object Window, the Parent Window is never visible and it does not have a size.

The Parent Window can have descendants which can be either Child Windows or
Dialogues.

Note:  There can only be one Parent Window defined within Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 399. Help for Child Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Child Window is window which is used to provide secondary information in
conjunction with the main Parent Window of the program.

The Child Window can be a descendant of either the Desktop or the Main Window.

When the Child Window is a descendant of the Desktop, the window can be moved
anywhere on the desktop.  When the Main Window is moved or minimized, the Child
Window usually is not affected.

When it is a descendant of the Main Window, it can only be moved within the
Main Window.  When the Main Window is moved or minimized, the Child Window is
moved or hidden with it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 400. Help for Dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Dialogue is window which is used to provide either information or a means of
allowing the user to enter specific data to the program.

By default, the dialogue is a child of the Main Window.

The Dialogue cannot have menus or general acclerators associated with them but
can have most other styles that a normal window can have.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 401. Help for Notebook Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Notebook page is window which is used to provide either information or a
means of allowing the user to enter specific data to the program which is
associated to a specific notebook that is contained within a window or
dialogue.

To aid in the design of a notebook page, a notebook is displayed which is the
size of the notebook associated in the Notebook page linkage group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 402. Help for WP Settings Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A WP Settings page is a window which is used to provide either information or a
means of allowing the user to enter specific data to the program which is
associated to a specific notebook that is contained within a Workplace Settings
page.

To aid in the design of a Workplace Settings page, a Workplace Settings
notebook is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 403. Help for PMCX Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A PMCX Window is a control window which is used for the custom control that you
are creating.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 404. Help for None method ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A None method prevents Prominare Designer from creating the necessary code
within the main( ) function that will create the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 405. Help for main( ) method ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A main( ) method causes Prominare Designer to create the necessary code within
the main( ) function that will create the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 406. Help for None method ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A WM_CREATE method causes Prominare Designer to create the necessary code
within theWM_CREATE message of the window procedure specified through the
Associated drop down list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 407. Help for Decimal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want the display of ID symbols to be decimal, select the Decimal radio
button.  Alternately, if you want the display of the ID symbols to be
hexidecimal, select the Hex radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 408. Help for Hex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want the display of ID symbols to be hexidecimal, select the Hex radio
button.  Alternately, if you want the display of the ID symbols to be
hexidecimal, select the Decimal radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 409. Help for Title Bar Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want a window or dialogue to have a Title Bar which allows the user to
select the title bar to move it around, select the Title Bar check box.

The Title Bar, as its name suggests, allows for a title to be included within
it.  This should be a short description that best exemplifies the contents of
the window or the task of the dialogue.

Note:  The OS/2 Presentation Manager limits the length of the Title Bar text to
       60 characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 410. Help for System Menu Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The System Menu, which is located in the upper-left hand corner of a window or
dialogue.  It is not the same as the action bar and pull-down menus.  It is
mainly controlled and defined by the OS/2 Presentation Manager.

You usually include a System Menu in the main program window.

The System Menu generates WM_SYSCOMMAND messages instead of WM_COMMAND messages
and generally you allow these messages to be passed back to the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 411. Help for Horz. Scroll Bar Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Horz. Scroll Bar style allows you to add a Horizontal Scroll Bar to the
bottom of a window or dialogue.  You can use the Horizontal Scroll Bar to allow
the user to scroll the window horizontally.  You must provide the necessary
code to allow this in a manner that suits your application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 412. Help for Vert. Scroll Bar Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Vert. Scroll Bar style allows you to add a Vertical Scroll Bar to the right
side of a window or dialogue.  You can use the Vertical Scroll Bar to allow the
user to scroll the window vertically.  You must provide the necessary code to
allow this in a manner that suits your application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 413. Help for Visible Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

By selecting the Visible check box, you allow the window or dialogue to be
shown as soon as it is created.  There may be instances where you would prefer
to resize the window or dialogue when it is created and by not selecting
Visible, the window or dialogue will remain hidden until you resize it and then
show it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 414. Help for Size Border Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you want to allow the user to resize the window or dialogue, you should
select the Size Border check box.

A size border will be used as the window frame and when the mouse pointer
passes over the border, the pointer will change its shape to a double header
arrow.

When the pointer is the doulbe headed arrow shape and button 1 on the mouse is
pressed, the user will be able to resize the window or dialogue as required.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 415. Help for Border Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Border check box is used to create a simple border for the window or
dialogue.  This type of frame does not allow resizing by the user and usually
appears as a single line surronding the window or dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 416. Help for Dialogue Frame Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialogue Frame check box is used to create a Dialogue Frame border for the
window or dialogue.  The Dialogue Frame border is the same colour as the Title
Bar if one has been specified for the window or dialogue. Like the Border
style, it does not allow resizing by the user and will have some width and
depth to it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 417. Help for System Modal Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The System Modal check box is used to designate the window or dialogue as being
modal.  When used, the user will only be able to interact with that window or
dialogue.

CAUTION:
System modal should generally not be used by windows since the user will only
be able to interact with that window and will not be able to select others that
he or she has opened.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 418. Help for Menu Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Menu allows you to add an action bar menu and pull-downs to the window you
are designing.

Note:  The Menu check box will allow be available when you select Parent Window
       or Child Window radio buttons.  Menus cannot be used within Dialogues.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 419. Help for Min Button Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Min button check box allows you to add a Minimize button to the upper-right
corner of the window.

The Minimize button will allow the user to minimize the window.

When the window is minimized, the Icon for the application is placed on the
desktop.

Note:  The Min Box check box will only be available when you select Parent
       Window or Child Window radio buttons.  The Minimize button cannot be
       used within Dialogues.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 420. Help for Max Button Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Max button check box allows you to add a Maximize button to the upper-right
corner of the window.

The Maximize button will allow the user to maximize the window.

When the window is maximized, the entire desktop is replaced with the
application's window.

Note:  The Max Box check box will only be available when you select Parent
       Window or Child Window radio buttons.  The Maximize button cannot be
       used within Dialogues.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 421. Help for Min/Max Button Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Min/Max button allows you to add a Minimize button to the upper-right
corner of the window.

The Minimize button will allow the user to minimize the window whereas the
Maximize button will allow the user to maximize the window.

When the window is minimized, the Icon for the application is placed on the
desktop or within the Minimize Window Viewer.

When the window is maximized, the entire desktop is replaced with the
application's window.

Note:  The Min/Max button is only used when you select Standard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 422. Help for Hide Button Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Hide button check box allows you to add a Hide button to the upper-right
corner of the window.

The Hide button will allow the user to hide the window.

When the window is hidden, the window is placed within the Minimized Window
Viewer.

Note:  The Hide button check box will only be available when you select Parent
       Window or Child Window radio buttons.  The Maximize button cannot be
       used within Dialogues.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 423. Help for Accelerators Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Accelerators check box allows you to add a Accelerators to the application.

The Accelerators are generally associated with pull-down menu items.

When the window is maximized, the the entire desktop is replaced with the
application's window.

An example accelerator key is:

Paste    Shift+Ins

The Shift+Ins is the accelerator defined for the Paste pull-down menu item.

Note:  The Accelerator check box will only be available when you select Parent
       Window or Child Window radio buttons.  Accelerators cannot be used be
       defined within Dialogues since they have to be associated with the main
       application window.  You can define Accelerators within a Parent Window
       and any Child Windowsshift op Prominare Designer will consolidate the
       definitions into one table since the OS/2 Presentation Manager only
       allows one Accelerator table per application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 424. Help for Standard Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Standard check box can be used to create a Standard window.  A Standard
window includes the following styles:

     Title Bar
     System Menu
     Size Border
     Menu
     Min/Max Box
     Accelerators

 Note:  The Standard check box will only be available when you select Parent
        Window or Child Window radio buttons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 425. Help for Shell Position Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Shell position style is used to designate that the window size and position
should be determined by the system when it is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 426. Help for Window Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Window radio button is used to set the relative position of the Dialogue
being designed relative to the Parent Window.

Note:  The Window radio button will only be available when you select the
       Dialogue radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 427. Help for Screen Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Screen radio button is used to set the relative position of the Dialogue
being designed relative to the Desktop.

Note:  The Screen radio button will only be available when you select the
       Dialogue radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 428. Help for Mouse Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mouse radio button is used to set the relative position of the Dialogue
being designed relative to the mouse pointer position.

Note:  The Mouse radio button will only be available when you select the
       Dialogue radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 429. Help for Desktop Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Desktop radio button is used to set the parent of the window being
designed.  When the window is a descendant of the Desktop, the user, depending
on the controls you have added to the window, will have the ability to move the
window around on the OS/2 Presentation Manager Desktop.

Note:  The Desktop radio button will only be available when you select the
       Parent Window or Child Window radio buttons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 430. Help for Main Window Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Main Window radio button is used to set the parent of the window being
designed.  When the window is a descendant of the Main Window, the user,
depending on the controls you have added to the window, will only have the
ability to move the window within the window that it is a descendant of.

Note:  The Desktop radio button will only be available when you select the
       Child Window radio button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 431. Help for Object Window Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Object Window radio button is used to set the parent of the window being
designed.  When the window is a descendant of an Object Window, the window will
not be visible.

Generally, Object Windows are used within a separate thread of the application
to allow a background task to be perform but still have access to the OS/2
Presentation Manager messaging facilities.

Object windows can also be used as a separate program that acts as a background
task but where you would still like to be able to display dialogues or message
boxes to inform the user of significant events or errors.

Note:  The Object Window radio button will only be available when you select
       the Parent Window or Child Window radio buttons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 432. Help for Text Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Text radio button is used to designate a menu item as an item that the OS/2
Presentation Manager should display as text.

The text that you provide for the menu item is used as the text for the final
menu item.

Prominare Designer will show the menu item with the text you enter for it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 433. Help for Bitmap Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bitmap radio button is used to designate a menu item as being a bitmap.

Any text that you enter for the menu item will be ignored since the OS/2
Presentation Manager will use a bitmap that you supply as the actual menu item.

Prominare Designer will simulate the bitmap that you supply similar to below:

Note:  When using the Bitmap style, you will have to provide the necessary code
       to load and size the bitmap and associate it to the menu item.

 The following is an example of loading the bitmap and associating it to the
 menu item within your source code:

  VOID AddBitmapMenu( )

  {
  HBITMAP  hBMshift op      /* Bitmap Handle    */
  HWND     hSubMenushift op /* Sub-Menu Handle  */
  HPS      hPSshift op      /* PS Handle        */
  MENUITEM mishift op       /* Menu Item Holder */

  hPS = WinGetPS(hwndWinEdit)shift op

  hBM = GpiLoadBitmap(hPS, NULL, 7,
                      32L, 16L)shift op

  WinSendMsg(hSubMenu =
             WinWindowFromID(hwndWindow, FID_MENU),
             MM_QUERYITEM,
             MPFROM2SHORT(IDM_BITMAP, 1),
             MPFROMP(&mi))shift op

  mi.hItem = (ULONG)hBMshift op
  WinSendMsg(hSubMenu, MM_SETITEM,
             MPFROM2SHORT(0, 1),
             MPFROMP(&mi))shift op

  WinReleasePS(hPS)shift op
  }


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 434. Help for Separator Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you to place a dividing line between menu items, select the Separator
check box.

It is sometimes useful to do this since it will allow you to group like menu
items together and will make the menu visually easier to use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 435. Help for Break Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Break check check box allows you to create a multiple column menu if it is
a pull down or it will create a multiple line action bar menu.

The menu item that you associate the Break with will be the last item in the
column or line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 436. Help for Break/Separator Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Break/Separator check box allows you to create a multiple column menu with
a separating line between the columns.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 437. Help for Button Separator Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Button Separator check box allows you to create an action bar menu item
activated only by the mouse.  The text of the action bar item is centered
instead of being left justified.

This is usually used to place an action bar item on the right side of the
action bar.

Note:  It is possible to use the Button Separator style with pull-down menu
       items but it is not recommended.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 438. Help for Sub-Menu Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Sub-Menu check box is used to designate a pull-down menu item as a
Sub-Menu.

The menu item when shown will have an arrow on the far right indicating to the
user that further menu items are available.

To create the menu items for the sub-menu, you select the Sub-Menu on the
Control pull-down menu and select the menu item you have created with the
Sub-Menu style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 439. Help for Help Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help check box is used to specify that when the menu item is selected, a
WM_HELP message be sent to the window containing the menu item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 440. Help for SYSCOMMAND Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The SYSCOMMAND check box is used to specify that when the menu item is
selected, a WM_SYSCOMMAND message be sent to the window containing the menu
item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 441. Help for Child System Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Child system menu menu style is used to create a child system menu within
the action bar for applications that are using a MDI type of interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 442. Help for Static Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Static menu style is not used presently within OS/2 and is provided within
Prominare Designer for consistancy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 443. Help for Group Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Group menu style is not used presently within OS/2 and is provided within
Prominare Designer for consistancy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 444. Help for Single Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Single menu style is not used presently within OS/2 and is provided within
Prominare Designer for consistancy.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 445. Help for Single Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Owner draw is used to designate that the menu item that will be drawn by using
code defined within the owner window instead of having the system provide the
drawing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 446. Help for Checked Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Checked attribute is used to place a check mark beside the pull-down menu
item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 447. Help for Disabled Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Disabled attribute is used to disable the menu item.

When Disabled, the user cannot select the item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 448. Help for Framed Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Framed attribute is used to place a frame around the pull-down menu item.

The frame appears as a heavy border.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 449. Help for Hilighted Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Hilighted attribute is used to highlight the pull-down menu item.

The menu item, when displayed, will be have its colours inverted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 450. Help for No Dismiss Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No Dismiss attribute causes the menu item to remain displayed after being
selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 451. Help for Virtual Key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Virtual Key check box is used to designate the key selected is a virtual
key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 452. Help for Scan Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Scan Code check box is used to designate the key selected is a scan code
key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 453. Help for Char ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Char check box is used to designate the key selected is a character key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 454. Help for Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help check box is used to designate the key selected as a help key.

Note:  The key will be translated into a WM_HELP message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 455. Help for Alt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Alt check box is used to designate the key selected be used with the Alt
key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 456. Help for Ctrl ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ctrl check box is used to designate the key selected be used with the Ctrl
key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 457. Help for Shift ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Shift check box is used to designate the key selected be used with the
Shift key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 458. Help for SYSCOMMAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The SYSCOMMAND check box is used to cause the key selected to be translated
into a WM_SYSCOMMAND message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 459. Help for Icon Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To include an icon within your application, select the Icon resource type.

You must create the icon through an editor such as the Icon Editor provided in
the OS/2 Programmer's Toolkit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 460. Help for Font Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To include an font resource within your application, select the Font resource
type.

You must create the font through an editor such as the Font Editor provided in
the OS/2 Programmer's Toolkit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 461. Help for Bitmap Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To include an bitmap within your application, select the Bitmap resource type.

You must create the bitmap through an editor such as the Icon Editor provided
in the OS/2 Programmer's Toolkit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 462. Help for Pointer Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To include an pointer within your application, select the Pointer resource
type.

You must create the pointer through an editor such as the Icon Editor provided
in the OS/2 Programmer's Toolkit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 463. Help for String Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To include a string resource within your application, select the String
resource type.

A string could be the text within a message box or the application's title bar.

Strings are useful if you need to distribute your application in another
language.

Since all of the strings are localized, it will make translation of the strings
and their replacement easier rather than having to search through all of the
application's source code for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 464. Help for Message Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To include a message resource within your application, select the Message
resource type.

A string could be the text within a message box or a dialogue.

Messages are useful if you need to distribute your application in another
language.

Since all of the messages are localized, it will make translation of the
messages and their replacement easier rather than having to search through all
of the application's source code for them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 465. Help for Custom Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To include a custom resource within your application, select the Custom
resource type.

A custom resource can a file containing many text lines, such as a poem or a
set of instructions in free format.

Like other resources, you need to load the custom resource from the
application's resources before you can use them.

Note:  For an excellent discussion of custom resources, consult Charles
       Petzold's Programming the OS/2 Presentation Manager, Microsoft Press,
       Redmond, Washington, ISBN 1-55615-170-5), Chapter 12, Bitmaps, Icons,
       Pointers, and Stringsshift op pp. 562-570, Program-defined Resources.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 466. Help for Default Memory Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default memory option allows you to let the OS/2 Presentation Manager use
the default loading and memory options.

The defaults are:

     Load On Call
     Moveable
     Discardable


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 467. Help for Moveable Memory Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Moveable memory option allows you to designate the resource item as
moveable.

This allows OS/2 Presentation Manager to move the resource as necessary to
compact memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 468. Help for Preload Memory Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Preload memory option allows you to designate the resource item to be
loaded when the application starts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 469. Help for Discard Memory Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Discard memory option allows you to designate the resource item as
discardable.

Discardable resource items are discarded as required by the OS/2 Presentation
Manager when it needs the memory the resource is using.

The resource item would then be reloaded the next time it is needed within the
application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 470. Help for Left Aligned Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Left Aligned style forces the text within the Entry Field to be left
justified.

As text is entered into the Entry Field, it will expand to the right.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 471. Help for Centered Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Centered style forces the text within the Entry Field to be centered.

As text is entered into the Entry Field, it will expand to both the left and to
the right keeping the text centered.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 472. Help for Right Aligned Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Right Aligned style forces the text within the Entry Field to be right
justified.

As text is entered into the Entry Field, it will expand to the left.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 473. Help for Auto Horz Scroll Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To allow the text within the Entry Field to scroll within the field, the Auto
Horz Scroll style should be used.

This allows the user to see portions of the text within the Entry Field when it
is longer than the Entry Field itself.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 474. Help for Margin Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Margin style is used to place a border around the Entry Field allowing the
user to see the limits of the actual Entry Field.

When you do not use the Margin style, the mouse pointer will still change its
shape to an I-Beam when it passes over the marginless entry field allowing the
user to see that input is possible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 475. Help for Auto Tab Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Tab style indicates that when the field is filled when a character is
added to it, the effect of a tab key will be generated.  This only occurs when
the character is added to the end of entry field textshift op inserting and/or
replacing a character or characters in the middle of the text does not cause
the autotab to be generated.

The auto tab style is generally used with fixed-length entry fields where it
may be faster for the user to type in a fixed number of characters and then
have the cursor automatically move to the next field to allow a virtual
continuous typing interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 476. Help for Read Only Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Read Only style cause the entry field to be read only.

When an entry field is read only, no characters are permitted to be input into
the text.  You can, however, use the copy interface to the clipboard.

It is possible to dynamically change the read only state of the entry field
through the EM_SETREADONLY message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 477. Help for Command Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Command style designates that the entry field as a command entry field.
This is used by the Help Manager to provide command help if the user requests
help for this field.

Note:  Only entry field within each dialogue may have this style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 478. Help for Unreadable Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Unreadable style causes the text that is entered by the user to be
displayed as asterisks for each character.  Generally, this style is used to
create password entry fields.

Note:  To create an entry field that does not show what is being typed, use
       presentation parameters to cause the foreground and background to be the
       same colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 479. Help for Any Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Any style causes the text that is entered by the users to be a mixture SBCS
and DBCS characters.  When the number of characters of the entry field is
exceeded, an alarm is sounded and the last character entered is ignored.

This style is the default style for an entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 480. Help for SBCS Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The SBCS style is used to designate an entry field as being able to handle only
single byte characters.  When the number of characters of the entry field is
exceeded, an alarm is sounded and the last character entered is ignored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 481. Help for DBCS Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DBCS style is used to designate an entry field as being able to handle only
double byte characters.  When the number of characters of the entry field is
exceeded or a SBCS character is entered, an alarm is sounded and the last
character entered is ignored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 482. Help for Mixed Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mixed style is used to designate an entry field as being able to handle a
mixture of SBCS and DBCS characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 483. Help for Push Button Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Push Button style is used to designate the button as a Push Button.

A Push Button is usually used to start or stop an operation, or it can be used
to signal the acceptance or rejection.

Push Buttons are used within dialogues most often as OK and Cancel.

The OS/2 Presentation Manager provides two constants that can be used for the
OK and Cancel Push Buttons.  These are:

 Symbol:             Value:
 DID_OK              1
 DID_CANCEL          2

 You should use the DID_OK as the symbol for the OK Push Button and DID_CANCEL
 as the symbol for the Cancel Push Button.

 Prominare Designer predefines these two symbols for your use and will
 correctly generate the source code for within the dialogue procedures when you
 use these symbols for the two Push Buttons.  The following is an example of
 the source code generated:

  case WM_COMMAND :
    switch ( COMMANDMSG(&msg)->cmd )
      {
      case DID_OK :
        WinDismissDlg(hWnd, 1)shift op
        breakshift op

      case DID_CANCEL :
        WinDismissDlg(hWnd, 0)shift op
        breakshift op
      }
    breakshift op

 Note:  A Push Button sends a WM_COMMAND message to its owner window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 484. Help for Check Box Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Check Box style is used to designate the button as a Check Box.

A Check Box is toggled each time it is selected and unselected.

Check Boxes are generally used to set or clear an application feature.

Unlike an Auto Check Box, you will have to send messages to the Check Box to
set its state when selected by the user.

To set the Check Box, this can be done as follows:

WinSendDlgItemMsg(hWnd, ICB,
                  BM_SETCHECK,
                  MPFROMSHORT(1),
                  0L)shift op

To clear the Check Box, this can be done as follows:

WinSendDlgItemMsg(hWnd, ICB,
                  BM_SETCHECK,
                  MPFROMSHORT(0),
                  0L)shift op

Note:  A Check Box sends a WM_CONTROL message to its owner window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 485. Help for Auto Check Box Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Check Box style is used to designate the button as an Auto Check Box.

An Auto Check Box is toggled each time it is selected and unselected.

Auto Check Boxes are generally used to set or clear an application feature.

Unlike a Check Box, the Auto Check Box will automatically set its state when
selected by the user.

Note:  A Auto Check Box sends a WM_CONTROL message to its owner window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 486. Help for Radio Button Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Radio Button style is used to designate the button as a Radio Button.

A Radio Button is toggled each time it is selected and unselected.

Generally, Radio Buttons appear in groups where only one button is is selected
at a time.  The group of Radio Buttons usually provide an exclusive choice
amongst related options.

Unlike an Auto Radio Button, you will have to send messages to the Radio Button
to set its state when selected by the user.

To set the Radio Button, this can be done as follows:

WinSendDlgItemMsg(hWnd, IRB,
                  BM_SETCHECK,
                  MPFROMSHORT(1),
                  0L)shift op

To clear the Radio Button, this can be done as follows:

WinSendDlgItemMsg(hWnd, IRB,
                  BM_SETCHECK,
                  MPFROMSHORT(0),
                  0L)shift op

Note:  A Radio Button sends a WM_CONTROL message to its owner window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 487. Help for Auto Radio Button Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Radio Button style is used to designate the button as an Auto Radio
Button.

An Auto Radio Button is toggled each time it is selected and unselected.

Generally, Auto Radio Buttons appear in groups where only one button is is
selected at a time.  The group of Radio Buttons usually provide an exclusive
choice amongst related options.

Unlike a Radio Button, the Auto Radio Button will automatically set its state
when selected by the user.

Note:  A Auto Radio Button sends a WM_CONTROL message to its owner window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 488. Help for 3 State Check Box Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3 State Check Box style is used to designate the button as a 3 State Check
Box.

A 3 State Check Box is toggled each time it is selected.  The appearance will
be selected, unselected or halftoned.

3 State Check Boxes are generally used to set or clear an application feature.

Unlike an Auto 3 State Check Box, you will have to send messages to the Check
Box to set its state when selected by the user.

To set the 3 State Check Box, this can be done as follows:

WinSendDlgItemMsg(hWnd, ICB,
                  BM_SETCHECK,
                  MPFROMSHORT(1),
                  0L)shift op

To clear the 3 State Check Box, this can be done as follows:

WinSendDlgItemMsg(hWnd, ICB,
                  BM_SETCHECK,
                  MPFROMSHORT(0),
                  0L)shift op

Note:  A 3 State Check Box sends a WM_CONTROL message to its owner window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 489. Help for Auto 3 State Check Box Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto 3 State Check Box style is used to designate the button as an Auto 3
State Check Box.

An Auto  3 State Check Box is toggled each time it is selected.  The appearance
will be selected, unselected or halftoned.

Auto 3 State Check Boxes are generally used to set or clear an application
feature.

Unlike a 3 State Check Box, the Auto Auto 3 Check Box will automatically set
its state when selected by the user.

Note:  A Auto 3 State Check Box sends a WM_CONTROL message to its owner window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 490. Help for User Button Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The User Button style is used to designate the button as a User Button.

A User Button is generally used to created a button whose appearance is
different from the OS/2 Presentation Manager's predefined buttons.

The User Button is sent a BN_PAINT message each time it needs to be drawn and
when it is highlighted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 491. Help for Default Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Default option is used to designate a Push Button as the default when the
user presses the ENTER key within the dialogue when not within a Multi-Line
Entry Field.

The Push Button will appear with a thick border to indicate to the user that it
is the default.

Note:  A Default option is only available with Push Buttons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 492. Help for Help Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help option is used to designate a Push Button as the help button.

When the user selects the help button, a WM_HELP message will be generated
instead of a WM_COMMAND.

Note:  A Help option is only available with Push Buttons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 493. Help for SYSCOMMAND Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The SYSCOMMAND option is used to designate a Push Button as a SYSCOMMAND
button.

When the user selects the help button, a WM_SYSCOMMAND message will be
generated instead of a WM_COMMAND.

Note:  A SYSCOMMAND option is only available with Push Buttons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 494. Help for No Border Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No Border option is used to cause the Push Button to not have a border
drawn for it.

A Push Button with the No Border option will only have the text of the button
drawn but will still operate like a Push Button.

Note:  A No Border option is only available with Push Buttons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 495. Help for No Focus Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No Focus option is used to prevent the button from from receiving the focus
when selected.

For example, it is recommended that the help button use this option to prevent
it from receiving the focus to allow the Help Manager to correctly determine
the control ID that currently does have the focus and to provide the
appropriate Help Panel for the control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 496. Help for No Pointer Select Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No Pointer Select option is used to prevent a notification message to be
sent when the arrow keys are used within a group of Radio Buttons or Auto Radio
Buttons to move between each button.

The user must use the Space Bar to select the button after the highlight has
been move to it.

Note:  A No Pointer Select option is only available with Radio Buttons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 497. Help for Checked Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Checked option is used to set the state of a radio button, check box or 3
state check box.

Selecting the option causes the button to be selected when the dialogue is
first displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 498. Help for No Pointer Select Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Hilight option is used to set the highlight state of a Push Button.

Note:  A Hilight option is only available with a Push Button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 499. Help for Text Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Text style designates the item as Static Text

Static Text is non-interactive, meaning the user cannot interact within it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 500. Help for Group Box Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Group Box style is used to create a frame with a text label.

Group Boxes are useful in grouping like elements thereby providing a visible
separation between controls within a dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 501. Help for Icon Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Icon style is used to create a static Icon within a dialogue.

Usually, the Icon is placed within the About Box to allow the user visually see
the Icon of the program is it would appear on the desktop when the application
is minimized.

You should select the Icon on the Resource pull-down to define the final icon
within the application.

You must create the icon through an editor such as the Icon Editor provided in
the OS/2 Programmer's Toolkit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 502. Help for Bitmap Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bitmap style is used to create a static Bitmap within a dialogue.

You should select the Bitmap on the Resource pull-down to define the final
bitmap within the application.

You must create the bitmap through an editor such as the Icon Editor provided
in the OS/2 Programmer's Toolkit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 503. Help for System Icon Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The System Icon style is used to create a static System Icon within a dialogue.

Usually, the System Icon is placed within a dialogue to explain a point of
interest.

Since the System Icon is using a predefined icon with the OS/2 Presentation
Manager, special rules apply to how you define it.

Unlike other controls, you cannot enter values that are not a System Icon
designation.  The system icons that can be selected are:

      SPTR_ARROW
      SPTR_TEXT
      SPTR_WAIT
      SPTR_SIZE
      SPTR_MOVE
      SPTR_SIZENWSE
      SPTR_SIZENESW
      SPTR_SIZEWE
      SPTR_SIZENS
      SPTR_APPICON
      SPTR_ICONINFORMATION
      SPTR_ICONQUESTION
      SPTR_ICONERROR
      SPTR_ICONWARNING
      SPTR_ILLEGAL
      SPTR_FILE
      SPTR_FOLDER
      SPTR_MULTFILE
      SPTR_PROGRAM

 When you select the ID List push button to display the ID List, the normal ID
 List dialogue will not be displayed but instead in its place a dialogue that
 specifically shows the System Icon values.

 Within the dialogue, you can select the System Icon value and see what the
 icon will look like before you exit the dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 504. Help for Foreground Rect Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Foreground Rect style is used to create a dark, solid rectangle.

The colour of the rectangle is the inverse of the window background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 505. Help for Halftone Rect Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Halftone Rect style is used to create a coloured, solid rectangle.

The colour of the rectangle is the median of the window background and the
inverse of the window background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 506. Help for Background Rect Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Background Rect style is used to created a solid rectangle.

The colour of the rectangle is the window background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 507. Help for Foreground Frame Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Foreground Frame style is used to create a dark frame.

The colour of the frame is the inverse of the window background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 508. Help for Halftone Frame Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Halftone Frame style is used to create a coloured frame.

The colour of the frame is the median of the window background and the inverse
of the window background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 509. Help for Background Frame Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Background Rect style is used to created a frame.

The colour of the frame is the window background.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 510. Help for Left Aligned Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Left Aligned text style is used to left justify the text entered for the
Static Text style.

Note:  A Left Aligned style is only available with the Text style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 511. Help for Horz Aligned Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Horz. Aligned text style is used to center the text entered for the Static
Text style.

Note:  A Horz. Aligned style is only available with the Text style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 512. Help for Right Aligned Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Right Aligned text style is used to right justify the text entered for the
Static Text style.

Note:  A Right Aligned style is only available with the Text style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 513. Help for Top Aligned Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Top Aligned text style is used to top justify the text entered for the
Static Text style.

Note:  A Top Aligned style is only available with the Text style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 514. Help for Vert Centered Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Vert. Centered text style is used to vertically center the text entered for
the Static Text style.

Note:  A Vert. Centered style is only available with the Text style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 515. Help for Bottom Aligned Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bottom Aligned text style is used to bottom justify the text entered for
the Static Text style.

Note:  A Bottom Aligned style is only available with the Text style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 516. Help for Word Wrap Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Word Wrap text style is used to prevent text entered for the Static Text
style from being clipped.

This allows the text to flow to a new line within the Static Text size
rectangle if necessary.

Note:  A Word Wrap style is only available with the Text style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 517. Help for Halftone Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Halftone text style is used to displayy the text entered in a halftone for
the Static Text style.

Note:  A Halftone style is only available with the Text style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 518. Help for Mnemonic Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mnemonic text style is used to draw a the character within text entered for
the Static Text style following the mnemonic character (~) with mnemonic
emphasis.

Note:  A Mnemonic style is only available with the Text style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 519. Help for Multiple Selection Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To allow multiple items to be selected within a List Box use Multiple Selection
style.

This will allow a user to select multiple items from the list presented which
can, depending on the situation, simply the selection process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 520. Help for No Adjust Position Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

By using the No Adjust Position style, the List Box will not be moved or
adjusted in size when the list box items cannot evenly fit within the display
area of the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 521. Help for User Redraw Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you want to draw the items within the List Box yourself, use the User
Redraw style.

Consult the OS/2 Programmer's Reference for more information on drawing list
box items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 522. Help for Horz Scroll Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a Horizontal Scroll Bar to the bottom of a List Box, use the Horz Scroll
style.

This will allow the user to scroll the contents of the list box horizontally
when items within it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 523. Help for Simple Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a Combo Box that just contains an entry field and a list box, use the
Simple style.

Both the entry field and list box will be visible at all times.

The user can then select an item within the list box to insert into the entry
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 524. Help for Drop Down Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a Combo Box that just contains an entry field and button, use the
Drop Down style.

The drop down button appears as a downward pointing arrow on the right edge of
the entry field.

When the user selects the drop down button, the list box will appear where the
user can then select an item within the list box to insert into the entry
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 525. Help for Drop Down List Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a Combo Box that just contains an entry field and button but where
the user can type into the entry field, use the Drop Down style.

The drop down button appears as a downward pointing arrow on the right edge of
the entry field.

When the user selects the drop down button, the list box will appear where the
user can then select an item within the list box to insert into the entry
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 526. Help for Thumb Size Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting the Thumb Size option indicates that you wish to set the scroll bar
thumb to a given size through the entry fields labeled Low range, High range,
Visible and Total.

This gives visual feedback to the user regarding the relative number of items
that can be scrolled and what number is visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 527. Help for Auto Track Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting the Auto Track option is used to allow the scroll bar to move when
selected by the mouse pointer instead of an outline representation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 528. Help for Border Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To create a border for a Multi-Line Entry Field, use Border style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 529. Help for Horizontal Scroll Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To include a horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of a Multi-Line Entry Field,
use the Horizontal Scroll style.

This will allow the user to scroll horizontally the contents of the Multi-Line
Entry Field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 530. Help for Vertical Scroll Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To include a vertical scroll bar on the right side of a Multi-Line Entry Field,
use the Vertical Scroll style.

This will allow the user to scroll vertically the contents of the Multi-Line
Entry Field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 531. Help for Ignore Tab Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To cause the Multi-Line Entry Field to ignore the Tab Key, select the Ignore
Tab style.

This will prevent the Multi-Line Entry Field from acting on the Tab Key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 532. Help for Read Only Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To cause the Multi-Line Entry Field to not allow any input or editing of its
contents, use the Read Only style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 533. Help for Word Wrap Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you have not used either a Horizontal Scroll Bar or Vertical Scroll Bar
styles in the Multi-Line Entry Field and want to text to fit within the
Multi-Line Entry Field, use the Word Wrap style.

This will cause the text to be formatted to fit within the Multi-Line Entry
Field by breaking a word off of a line onto the next if it will not fit on the
line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 534. Help for Master Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Master type is used to designate the spin as the master consisting of at
least one single spin field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 535. Help for Servant Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Servant type is used to create a multi-field spin button by spinning
servants from the master.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 536. Help for Left Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Left style is used to left justify the text of a spin button spin field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 537. Help for Centered Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Centered style is used to center the text of a spin button spin field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 538. Help for Right Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Left style is used to right justify the text of a spin button spin field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 539. Help for All Characters Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The All characters style is used to allow any character to be entered in the
spin button spin field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 540. Help for Numeric Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Numeric style is used to allow only numeric values to be entered in the
spin button spin field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 541. Help for Read Only Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Read only style is used to prevent values from being entered in the spin
button spin field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 542. Help for No Border Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No border style is used to create a spin button spin field without a
border.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 543. Help for Fast Spin Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Fast spin style is used to enable the spin button to increase the spin
speed with time.  The speed of spinning will double every two seconds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 544. Help for Zero Pad Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Zero pad style is used to cause the output number to be padded at the front
with zeroes between the first non-zero digit number and the field width, or 11
characters whichever is the lesser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 545. Help for Auto Icon Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto icon style is used to cause performance optimization. When repainting
iconized frames, OS/2 Presentation Manager will redraw the icon and will not
send a WM_PAINT message to the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 546. Help for Entry Field Auto Size Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Size style is used to cause the text to be sized such that the
contents fit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 547. Help for Buttons Icon Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Icon style is used to cause an icon to be used in place of text within the
push button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 548. Help for Buttons Mini-Icon Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mini-icon style is used to cause an mini-icon within the push button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 549. Help for Buttons Text Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Text style is used to cause an text within the push button when also
including a bitmap or icon within the button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 550. Help for Buttons Bitmap Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bitmap style is used to cause an bitmap to be used in place of text within
the push button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 551. Help for Buttons Auto Size Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Size style is used to cause the button to be sized such that the
contents fit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 552. Help for Scroll Bar Auto Size Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Size style is used to cause the scroll bar to change size reflecting
the amount of data contained within a window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 553. Help for Static Auto Size Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Size style is used to cause the static control to be sized such that
the contents fit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 554. Help for Extended Selection Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Extended Selection style is used to cause the extended selection user
interface to be enabled for the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 555. Help for Auto Tab Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Tab style indicates that when the field is filled when a character is
added to it, the effect of a tab key will be generated.  This only occurs when
the character is added to the end of entry field textshift op inserting and/or
replacing a character or characters in the middle of the text does not cause
the autotab to be generated.

The auto tab style is generally used with fixed-length entry fields where it
may be faster for the user to type in a fixed number of characters and then
have the cursor automatically move to the next field to allow a virtual
continuous typing interface.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 556. Help for Any Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Any style causes the text that is entered by the users to be a mixture SBCS
and DBCS characters.  When the number of characters of the entry field is
exceeded, an alarm is sounded and the last character entered is ignored.

This style is the default style for an entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 557. Help for SBCS Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The SBCS style is used to designate an entry field as being able to handle only
single byte characters.  When the number of characters of the entry field is
exceeded, an alarm is sounded and the last character entered is ignored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 558. Help for DBCS Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DBCS style is used to designate an entry field as being able to handle only
double byte characters.  When the number of characters of the entry field is
exceeded or a SBCS character is entered, an alarm is sounded and the last
character entered is ignored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 559. Help for Mixed Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mixed style is used to designate an entry field as being able to handle a
mixture of SBCS and DBCS characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 560. Help for Horz Scroll Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To add a Horizontal Scroll Bar to the bottom of a List Box, use the Horz Scroll
style.

This will allow the user to scroll the contents of the list box horizontally
when items within it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 561. Help for Disable Undo Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Disable Undo style is used to prevent the multiple-line entry field from
allowing undo actions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 562. Help for Extend Selection Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Extend Selection style is used to allow the user to select one or more
container items.  It allows the user to select one item, a range of items or
even multiple ranges of items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 563. Help for Auto Position Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Position style is used to cause container items to be displayed in the
icon view to be arranged when the user does one of the following:

     The window size changes

     Container items are inserted, removed, sorted, invalidated, or filtered

     The font or font size changes

     The window title text changes.

 In all of these cases, container items are arranged the same as when the
 CM_ARRANGE message is sent.

 Note:  The Auto Position style is only valid when it is used with the icon
        view.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 564. Help for Verify Pointers Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Verify Pointers style is used to cause the verification of the application
pointers as being members of the container before they are used.

Notes

   1. The CCS_VERIFYPOINTERS style bit does not verify the validity of a
      pointer. It only verifies whether a pointer is a member of a container's
      linked list.

   2. After your code has been developed and tested, you may want to remove the
      CCS_VERIFYPOINTERS style bit in order to improve the container's
      performance. Otherwise, the container will attempt to verify all
      pointers, which will slow its response to actions that users perform.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 565. Help for Multiple Selection Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Multiple Selection style is used to allow the user to select zero or more
container items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 566. Help for Single Selection Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Single Selection style is used to allow the user to only one container item
at any given time.

When a container item is selected, the previous container item selected is
de-selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 567. Help for Mini Record Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mini record style is used to cause the container to interpret all container
records as being smaller than they would otherwise be. If a CM_ALLOCRECORD
message is received, all records are interpreted and allocated according to the
information in the MINIRECORDCORE data structure instead of the RECORDCORE data
structure, which is used if this style is not specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 568. Help for Mini Icons Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mini icons style is used to cause the container to support mini-icons
within in the MINIRECORDCORE data structure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 569. Help for No Control Pointer Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No control pointer style is used to prevent the container from sending a
WM_CONTROLPOINTER message when a WM_MOUSEMOVE message is received by the
container.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 570. Help for Read Only Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Read Only style is used to prevent the user from editing any of the text
within a container window.  When this style is not used, the user can edit any
text in a container window unless you set the read-only attributes within the
appropriate data structures:

      CA_TITLEREADONLY Sets the container title to read-only. This is an
      attribute of the CNRINFO data structure's flWindowAttr field.

      CRA_RECORDREADONLY Sets text fields in records to read-only. This is an
      attribute of the RECORDCORE and MINIRECORDCORE data structures'
      flRecordAttr field.

      Note:  If the CCS_MINIRECORDCORE style bit is specified when a container
      is created, the MINIRECORDCORE should be used instead of RECORDCORE and
      PMINIRECORDCORE should be used instead of PRECORDCORE in all applicable
      data structures and messages.

      CFA_FIREADONLY Sets column data to read-only. This is an attribute of the
      FIELDINFO data structure's flData field.

      CFA_FITITLEREADONLY Sets column headings to read-only. This is an
      attribute of the FIELDINFO data structure's flTitle field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 571. Help for Horizontal Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Horizontal style is used to cause the slider to be positioned horizontally.
The slider arm can move left and right on the slider shaft. A scale can be
placed on top of the slider shaft, below the slider shaft, or in both places.
This is the default orientation of the slider.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 572. Help for Vertical Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Vertical style is used to cause the slider to be positioned vertically. The
slider arm can move up and down the slider shaft. A scale can be placed on the
left side of the slider shaft, on the right side of the slider shaft, or in
both places.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 573. Help for Buttons Bottom Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Buttons Bottom style is used to cause the slider to include incremental
slider buttons.  They are placed at the bottom of the slider shaft and cause
the slider arm to move by one position, either up or down, in the direction
indicated by the selected button.

Note:  This is valid for vertical sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 574. Help for Buttons Top Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Buttons Top style is used to cause the slider to include incremental slider
buttons.  They are placed at the top of the slider shaft and cause the slider
arm to move by one position, either up or down, in the direction indicated by
the selected button.

Note:  This is valid for vertical sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 575. Help for Buttons Right Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Buttons Right style is used to cause the slider to include incremental
slider buttons.  They are placed at the right of the slider shaft and cause the
slider arm to move by one position, either left or right, in the direction
indicated by the selected button.

Note:  This is valid for horizontal sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 576. Help for Buttons Left Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Buttons Left style is used to cause the slider to include incremental
slider buttons.  They are placed at the left of the slider shaft and cause the
slider arm to move by one position, either left or right, in the direction
indicated by the selected button.

Note:  This is valid for horizontal sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 577. Help for Bottom Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bottom style is used to cause the slider to be positioned at the bottom of
the slider window.

Note:  This is valid for horizontal sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 578. Help for Top Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Top style is used to cause the slider to be positioned at the top of the
slider window.

Note:  This is valid for horizontal sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 579. Help for Left Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Left style is used to cause the slider to be positioned at the left of the
slider window.

Note:  This is valid for vertical sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 580. Help for Right Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Right style is used to cause the slider to be positioned at the right of
the slider window.

Note:  This is valid for vertical sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 581. Help for Snap to Increment Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Snap to Increment style is used to cause the slider arm, when moved to a
position between two specified values on the slider scale, such as between two
tick marks, to be positioned on the nearest value and to be redrawn at that
position.

When the style is not specified, the slider arm remains at the position to
which it was moved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 582. Help for Owner Draw Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Owner Draw style is used to cause the application to be notified whenever
the slider shaft, the ribbon strip, the slider arm, and the slider background
are to be drawn.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 583. Help for Read Only Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Read Only style is used to cause the slider to be created as a read-only
slider.

This means that the user cannot interact with the slider. It is used merely as
a mechanism to present a quantity to the user, such as the percentage of
completion of an ongoing task. Visual differences for a read-only slider
include a narrow slider arm, no slider buttons and no detents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 584. Help for Ribbon Strip Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ribbon Strip style is used to cause the slider to fill the slider shaft
between the home position and the slider arm, as the slider arm moves, with a
colour that is different than the shaft colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 585. Help for Primary Scale 1 Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Primary Scale 1 style is used to cause the slider to use the increment and
spacing specified for scale 1 as the incremental value for the positioning of
the slider arm.

Scale 1 is displayed above the slider shaft of a horizontal slider and to the
right of the slider shaft of a vertical slider. This is the default for a
slider.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 586. Help for Primary Scale 2 Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Primary Scale 2 style is used to cause the slider to use the increment and
spacing specified for scale 2 as the incremental value for the positioning of
the slider arm.

Scale 2 is displayed below the slider shaft of a horizontal slider and to the
left of the slider shaft of a vertical slider.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 587. Help for Home Bottom Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Home Bottom style is used to cause the slider to use the bottom of the
slider as the base value for incrementing.

This is the default for vertical sliders.

Note:  This is valid for vertical sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 588. Help for Home top Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Home Top style is used to cause the slider to use the top of the slider as
the base value for incrementing.

Note:  This is valid for vertical sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 589. Help for Home Right Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Home Right style is used to cause the slider to use the right of the slider
as the base value for incrementing.

Note:  This is valid for horizontal sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 590. Help for Home Left Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Home Left style is used to cause the slider to use the left of the slider
as the base value for incrementing.

This is the default for horizontal sliders.

Note:  This is valid for horizontal sliders only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 591. Help for Center Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Center style is used to cause the slider to be centered in the slider
window. This is the default positioning of the slider.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 592. Help for Value Set Bitmap Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bitmap style is used to cause each value set item to be treated as a
bitmap.  This is the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 593. Help for Value Set Icon Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Icon style is used to cause the value set item to be treated as icons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 594. Help for Value Set Text Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Text style is used to cause each value set item to be treated as text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 595. Help for Colour Index Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Colour Index style is used to cause each value set item to be treated as an
index into the logical colour table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 596. Help for Value Set Colour Info Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Colour info style is used to cause each value set item to be treated as a
RGB colour value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 597. Help for Value Set Border Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Border style is used to cause a thin border around the value set to allow
it to delineate the control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 598. Help for Value Set Item Border Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Item Border style is used to cause a thin border around each value set item
to allow it to be delineated from the other items.

Note:  The VS_ITEMBORDER style is useful for items that are hard to see, such
       as faint colors or patterns.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 599. Help for Value Set Scale Bitmaps Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Scale Bitmaps style is used to cause the value set to automatically scale
bit maps to the size of the cell.

If this style is not used, each bit map is centered in its cell. Also, if the
cell is smaller than the bit map, the bit map is clipped to the size of the
cell.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 600. Help for Right to Left Ordering Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Right to Left Ordering style is used to cause the value set to interpret
column orientation as right-to-left, instead of the default left-to-right
arrangement. This means columns are numbered from right-to-left with the
rightmost column being 1 and counting up as you move left. Home is the
rightmost column and end is the leftmost column.

There is no visible difference between a value set ordered left-to-right and a
value set ordered right-to-left. Therefore, if your application uses multiple
value sets, the ordering of the items should be consistent in each value set to
avoid confusing the user.

Note:  The VS_RIGHTTOLEFT style is used on creation of the control. Changing
       this style after creation causes unexpected results.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 601. Help for Owner Draw Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Owner Draw style is used to cause the application to be notified whenever
the background of the value set window is to be painted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 602. Help for Backpage Bottom Right Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Backpage Bottom Right style is used to cause the back pages to be painted
on the notebook's bottom and right sides. This is the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 603. Help for Backpage Bottom Left Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Backpage Bottom Left style is used to cause the back pages to be painted on
the notebook's bottom and left sides.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 604. Help for Backpage Top Right Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Backpage Top Right style is used to cause the back pages to be painted on
the notebook's top and right sides.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 605. Help for Backpage Top Left Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Backpage Top Left style is used to cause the back pages to be painted on
the notebook's top and left sides.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 606. Help for Major Tab Right Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Major Tab Right style is used to cause the major tabs to be placed on the
notebook's right edge.

Note:  Only valid in combination with Backpage Bottom Right or Backpage Top
       Right. This is the default when either of these back pages styles is
       used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 607. Help for Major Tab Left Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Major Tab Left style is used to cause the major tabs to be placed on the
notebook's left edge.

Note:  Only valid in combination with Backpage Bottom Left or Backpage Top
       Left. This is the default when Backpage Top Left style is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 608. Help for Major Tab Top Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Major Tab Top style is used to cause the major tabs to be placed on the
notebook's top edge.

Note:  Only valid in combination with Backpage Top Right or Backpage Top Left.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 609. Help for Major Tab Bottom Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Major Tab Bottom style is used to cause the major tabs to be placed on the
notebook's bottom edge.

Note:  Only valid in combination with Backpage Bottom Right or Backpage Bottom
       Left. This is the default when Backpage Bottom Left style is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 610. Help for Square Tabs Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Square Tabs style is used to cause the tabs to be drawn with square edges.
This is the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 611. Help for Rounded Tabs Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Rounded Tabs style is used to cause the tabs to be drawn with rounded
edges.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 612. Help for Polygon Tabs Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Polygon Tabs style is used to cause the tabs to be drawn with polygon
edges.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 613. Help for Status Text Left Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Status Text Left style is used to cause the status text to be left
justified on the status line.  This is the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 614. Help for Status Text Center Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Status Text Center style is used to cause the status text to be centered on
the status line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 615. Help for Status Text Right Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Status Text Right style is used to cause the status text to be right
justified on the status line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 616. Help for Spiral Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Spiral style is used to cause a spiral binding to be painted on the
notebook.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 617. Help for Solid Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Spiral style is used to cause a solid binding to be painted on the
notebook.  This is the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 618. Help for Action Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An Action Bar menu item allows the user to select a menu item which may or may
not display a pull-down menu.

Since the Action Bar can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard, it
is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 619. Help for Sub-Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Sub-Menuitem allows the user to select a menu item from a pull-down menu.

Since the Sub-Menu item can be select using either the mouse or the keyboard,
it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 620. Help for Push Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Push Button allows the user to perform an action within a window or dialogue.

Since the Push Button can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard,
it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 621. Help for Check Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Check Box allows the user to toggle an option on or off within a window or
dialogue.

Since the check Box can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard, it
is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 622. Help for Radio Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Radio Button allows the user to select an option within a group of options in
a window or dialogue.

Since the Radio Button can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard,
it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 623. Help for Entry Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An Entry Field allows the user to enter text into the window or dialogue.

Since the Entry Field can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard,
it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 624. Help for List Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A List Box allows the user to select from a list of items within a window or
dialogue.

Since the List Box can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard, it
is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 625. Help for Combo Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Combo Box allows the user to enter or select items within a window or
dialogue.

Since the Combo Box can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard, it
is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 626. Help for Multi-Line Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Multi-Line Entry allows the user to enter text into the window or dialogue
through an an entry field or to select predefined items from a drop down list
box.

Since the Multi-Line Entry can be selected using either the mouse or the
keyboard, it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a
Help Sub-Menu Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 627. Help for Spin Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Spin Button allows the user to select predefined items within a group of
fields by clicking the mouse pointer on a arrowed button.

Since the Spin Button can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard,
it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 628. Help for Container ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Container allows the user to place a group of objects within a gathering
control.

Since the Container can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard, it
is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 629. Help for Slider ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Slider allows the user to position a sliding indicator relative to a given
scale.

Since the Slider can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard, it is
considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu Item
when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 630. Help for Value Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Value Set allows the user to select from a displayed group of similar items.

Since the Value Set can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard, it
is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 631. Help for Notebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Notebook allows the user to place a group of objects within a gathering
control.

Since the Notebook can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard, it
is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 632. Help for User Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A User Button allows the user to perform an action within a window or dialogue.

Since the User Button can be selected using either the mouse or the keyboard,
it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 633. Help for Circular Slider ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Circular Slider allows the user to position a sliding indicator relative to a
given scale within MMPM/2 applications.

Since the Circular Slider can be selected using either the mouse or the
keyboard, it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a
Help Sub-Menu Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 634. Help for Graphical Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Graphical Button allows the user to perform an action within a window or
dialogue.

Since the Graphical Button can be selected using either the mouse or the
keyboard, it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a
Help Sub-Menu Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 635. Help for Handwriting Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Handwriting Control allows the user to enter information using a pen device
window or dialogue.

Since the Handwriting Control can be selected using either the mouse or pen
device, it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help
Sub-Menu Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 636. Help for Sketch Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A Sketch Control allows the user to enter information using a pen device window
or dialogue.

Since the Sketch Control can be selected using either the mouse or pen device,
it is considered an interactive control and will be selected as a Help Sub-Menu
Item when building the Help Sub-Table.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 637. Help for Queue Handle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Queue handle is required in each OS/2 Presentation Manager program.  It
usually takes the form of:

hmqApp


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 638. Help for Frame Handle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Frame handle is used to contain a windows frame handle as returned by the
WinCreateStdWindow function.  It usually takes the form of:

hwndAppFrame


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 639. Help for Client Handle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Client handle is used to contain the windows client handle as returned
through the WinCreateStdWindow function.  It usually takes the form of:

hwndApp


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 640. Help for Menu Handle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Menu handle is used to contain the windows action bar handle.  Prominare
Designer will create the necessary code within the WM_CREATE message handling
to retrieve the menu handle for the application.

It usually takes the form of:

hmenuApp


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 641. Help for WM_CREATE Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Prominare Designer allows you specify a separate function to handle the
WM_CREATE message instead of having the main window procedure code handling the
message.

You must provide the name of the function that will handle the message along
with the name of the source file where the function will be contained.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 642. Help for WM_INITMENU Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Prominare Designer allows you specify a separate function to handle the
WM_INITMENU message instead of having the main window procedure code handling
the message.

You must provide the name of the function that will handle the message along
with the name of the source file where the function will be contained.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 643. Help for WM_COMMAND Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Prominare Designer allows you specify a separate function to handle the
WM_COMMAND message instead of having the main window procedure code handling
the message.

You must provide the name of the function that will handle the message along
with the name of the source file where the function will be contained.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 644. Help for Using Help Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Using help menu item within the Help pull-down menu is generally used to
provide information on how to access the Using help within the Help Manager.

IBM CUA Guidelines suggest that the following menu items are provided to
promote consistancy:

     Help index
     General help
     Using help
     Keys help
     Product information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 645. Help for General Help Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The General help menu item is used to provide information about the contents of
the application's main window.

IBM CUA Guidelines suggest that the following menu items are provided to
promote consistancy:

     Help index
     General help
     Using help
     Keys help
     Product information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 646. Help for Keys Help Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Keys help menu item is used to provide information for the key assignments
used within the application.

IBM CUA Guidelines suggest that the following menu items are provided to
promote consistancy:

     Help index
     General help
     Using help
     Keys help
     Product information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 647. Help for Help Index Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help index menu item is used to display an alphabetic list of all help
index entries for the application.

IBM CUA Guidelines suggest that the following menu items are provided to
promote consistancy:

     Help index
     General help
     Using help
     Keys help
     Product information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 648. Help for Production Information Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Product information menu item is used to allow your application to display
a dialogue or window containing the application icon, application name and
copyright notice.

IBM CUA Guidelines suggest that the following menu items are provided to
promote consistancy:

     Help index
     General help
     Using help
     Keys help
     Product information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 649. Help for Numbered Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CUA Advanced Interface Design Guide states that for action bars and
pull-downs, "you should not number choices".

Since the user can easily select menu items when interacting with the
application and to provide consistancy across applications, you should refrain
from using a number as a menu choice.

Note:  An exception to this rule occurs in Multiple Document Interface
       applications in the Window pull-down.  Since the bottom part of the
       Window pull-down is used to allow the user to change the active window,
       an application usually provides a variable list of choices.

The CUA Advanced Interface Design Guide states that the "pull-down must have
the number of the choice assigned as its mnemonic.  In that case, use the
accepted capitalization"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 650. Help for Capilization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CUA Advanced Interface Design Guide states that "you should capitalize only
the first letter of a choice unless it contains an acronym, abbreviation, or
proper noun that is normally capitalized.".


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 651. Help for Mnemonic Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CUA Advanced Interface Design Guide states that you should give each action
bar, pull-down or button choice "a unique single-character mnemonic that can be
used to select the choice.".

A mnemonic is a single character that allows the user to quickly select a
choice from the keyboard.  SAA recommends that all applications support
mnemonics.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 652. Help for Action Bar Ordering ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CUA Advanced Interface Design Guide states that you should "place the
action bar choices, as applicable, in the following order:

     File
     Edit
     Any application-specific choices, in order according to frequency of use.
      These may include View and Options.
     Help"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 653. Help for Action Bar Double Words ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CUA Advanced Interface Design Guide states that "you should use only
single-word choices.".

This ensures that no confusion arises when the user views the action bar menu
items since blank space is used to separate each action bar item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 654. Help for Dialogue System Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CUA Advanced Interface Design Guide states that the user can "select the
Close action from the system menu of the dialogue box.".

This normally applies when you include a title bar in the dialogue.  If no
title bar is present, the rule is not applied by Prominare Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 655. Help for Push Button Ellipsis ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The CUA Advanced Interface Design Guide states that you should "not leave any
space between the pushbutton text and an ellipsis.".

This normally applies when you include a push button where the action
associated with the push button results in another dialogue box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 656. Help for Menu Foreground Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default foreground colour within the menu item, use the
Foreground check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 657. Help for Menu Background Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default background colour within the menu item, use the
Background check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 658. Help for Menu Highlight Foreground Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default highlight foreground colour within the menu item, use the
Highlight Foreground check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 659. Help for Menu Highlight Background Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default highlight background colour within the menu item, use the
Highlight Background check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 660. Help for Menu Disabled Foreground Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default disabled foreground colour within the menu item, use the
Disabled Foreground check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 661. Help for Menu Disabled Background Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default disabled background colour within the menu item, use the
Disabled Background check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 662. Help for Foreground Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default foreground colour within the control, use the Foreground
check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 663. Help for Background Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default background colour within the control, use the Background
check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 664. Help for Highlight Foreground Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default highlight foreground colour within the control, use the
Highlight Foreground check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 665. Help for Highlight Background Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default highlight background colour within the control, use the
Highlight Background check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 666. Help for Highlight Foreground Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default disabled foreground colour within the control, use the
Disabled Foreground check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 667. Help for Highlight Background Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default disabled background colour within the control, use the
Disabled Background check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 668. Help for Border Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the default border colour within the control, use the Border check
box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 669. Help for Active Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the active colour within the control, use the Active colour check box
to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 2.0 and OS/2 2.1 controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 670. Help for Inactive Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the inactive colour within the control, use the Inactive colour check
box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 2.0 and OS/2 2.1 controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 671. Help for Active Text Foreground ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the active colour within the control, use the Active text foreground
check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 2.0 and OS/2 2.1 controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 672. Help for Inactive Text Foreground ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the inactive text foreground colour within the control, use the
Inactive text foreground check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 2.0 and OS/2 2.1 controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 673. Help for Active Text Background ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the active background colour within the control, use the Active text
background check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 2.0 and OS/2 2.1 controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 674. Help for Inactive Text Background ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the inactive text background colour within the control, use the
Inactive text background check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 2.0 and OS/2 2.1 controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 675. Help for Shadow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the shadow colour within the control, use the Shadow check box to
select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 2.0 and OS/2 2.1 controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 676. Help for Shadow Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the shadow text colour within the control, use the Shadow text check
box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 Warp and WPOS controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 677. Help for Shadow Hilight Foreground ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the shadow hilight foreground colour within the control, use the
Shadow hilight foreground check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 Warp and WPOS controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 678. Help for Shadow Hilight Background ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the shadow hilight background colour within the control, use the
Shadow hilight background check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 Warp and WPOS controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 679. Help for Icon Background ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To change the icon background colour within the control, use the Icon
background check box to select another colour.

A coloured button immediately to the right of the check box allows you to to
display the colour table to select the desired colour.

From the colour table, you select the colour you want and then select the Set
push button to set the colour.

Note:  This should be used with OS/2 Warp and WPOS controls only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 680. Help for Private ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you have designed a custom control that is to be private, it must be
registered by the application.  This is done by using the XxxxRegister function
that must be within custom control dynamic-link library.

You should create an import library through Import Librarian to allow your
applications to easily reference the XxxxRegister function.

Prominare Designer will include the statement:

XxxxRegister(hAB)shift op

within the main( ) module of the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 681. Help for Temporary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You can use temporary custom controls within your application where you provide
the necessary code to handle the control.  You would treat the control just
like a normal window.

By using the temporary option, Prominare Designer will simulate the the
temporary control within your design.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 682. Help for <-date-> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <-date-> macro is used as a marker for the current date.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 683. Help for <-file-> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <-file-> macro is used as a marker for the current filename.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 684. Help for <DID_CANCEL> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <DID_CANCEL> macro is used as a marker for DID_CANCEL symbol.  Generally it
is used within a case statement within the WM_COMMAND message handling.  For
the most part, this macro symbol is used on within window and dialogues that
utilize push buttons and one of the push buttons is labeled Cancel and the
DID_CANCEL symbol is used to denote it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 685. Help for <DID_OK> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <DID_OK> macro is used as a marker for DID_OK symbol.  Generally it is used
within a case statement within the WM_COMMAND message handling.  For the most
part, this macro symbol is used on within window and dialogues that utilize
push buttons and one of the push buttons is labeled OK (or appropriate label)
and the DID_OK symbol is used to denote it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 686. Help for <FCF> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <FCF> macro is used as a marker for the frame control flags used within a
WinCreateStdWindow function.  The FCF_* flags are OR'ed together and assigned
usually to a variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 687. Help for <INCL> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <INCL> macro is used as a marker for the INCL_* definitions statements
which govern the OS/2 header files that are to be included with the source
module to aid in the compilation proces.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 688. Help for <PDSCtrl> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <PDSCtrl> macro is used as a marker for the location where the
PDSGetTemplate( ) statement is to be placed within the WM_CREATE message
handling when interactive controls are used in a window. (See also<defwinproc>)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 689. Help for <classname> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <classname> macro is used as a marker for the location where the window
classes are to be located.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 690. Help for <command> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <command> macro is used as a marker for the location where the command
statements are to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 691. Help for <cx> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <cx> macro is used as a marker for the location where the width of a window
is to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 692. Help for <cy> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <cy> macro is used as a marker for the location where the height of a
window is to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 693. Help for <defwinproc> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <defwinproc> macro is used as a marker for the location where the default
window procedure function is placed.  When controls are used within a window
and the PDSGetTemplate function is used (see <PDSCtrl>), the PDSDefWindowProc
is used in place of the WinDefWindowProc function.  The appropriate function
will be used in place of the macro.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 694. Help for <hwndClient> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <hwndClient> macro is used as a marker for the location where the client
window handle variable is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 695. Help for <hwndFrame> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <hwndFrame> macro is used as a marker for the location where the frame
window handle variable is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 696. Help for <hwndParent> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <hwndParent> macro is used as a marker for the location where the parent
window handle variable is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 697. Help for <id> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <id> macro is used as a marker for the location where an ID symbol or value
is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 698. Help for <idActionBar> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <idActionBar> macro is used as a marker for the location where an ID symbol
or value for an action menu is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 699. Help for <idButton> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <idButton> macro is used as a marker for the location where an ID symbol or
value for a push button is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 700. Help for <idDlg> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <idDlg> macro is used as a marker for the location where an ID symbol or
value for a dialogue is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 701. Help for <idMenu> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <idMenu> macro is used as a marker for the location where an ID symbol or
value for a menu item is used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 702. Help for <include> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <include> macro is used as a marker for the location where #include
statements are to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 703. Help for <localvars> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <localvars> macro is used as a marker for the location where local
variables defined for messages included within a window or dialogue procedure
are to be placed.  This location should be within the scope definitions of the
compiler that you are using.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 704. Help for <notify> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <notify> macro is used as a marker for the location where notification
messages are to be placed.  This is generally used in conjunction with the
WM_CONTROL message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 705. Help for <pfnDlgProc> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <pfnDlgProc> macro is used as a marker for the location where dialogue
procedure name is to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 706. Help for <pfnWndProc> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <pfnWndProc> macro is used as a marker for the location where window
procedure name is to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 707. Help for <statements> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <statements> macro is used as a marker for the location where message
statements are to be placed within a window or dialogue procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 708. Help for <statics> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <statics> macro is used as a marker for the location where static variables
are to be placed within a source module.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 709. Help for <style> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <style> macro is used as a marker for the location where style flags are to
be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 710. Help for <titlebar> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <titlebar> macro is used as a marker for the location where the title bar
text is to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 711. Help for <x> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <x> macro is used as a marker for the location where the x co-ordinate of
the window is to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 712. Help for <y> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The <x> macro is used as a marker for the location where the y co-ordinate of
the window is to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 713. Help for 2 state ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 2 state style is used to define a graphic button that has two states:  up
and down.  When the button is in the up state, the button represents an off
condition.  When it is in the down state, the button represents an on
condition.

When the button is pressed by the user, the owner of the button will receive a
notification message GBN_BUTTONDOWN to indicate that the button has been
pressed.  If the final state of the button is to be down, the owner of the
button must send a message to the button, GBM_SETSTATE to cause to remained
depressed.  The Auto 2 state  style can be used in place of this style to cause
the automatic up and down states to be recorded by the button and shown.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 714. Help for Auto 2 state ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto 2 state style is used to define a graphic button that has two states:
up and down.  When the button is in the up state, the button represents an off
condition.  When it is in the down state, the button represents an on
condition.

When the button is pressed by the user, if the button was in the up state, it
will show afterwards in the down state.  The reverse is true if the button was
in a down

The owner of the button will receive a notification message GBN_BUTTONDOWN to
indicate that the button has been pressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 715. Help for Animation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Animation style is used cause the graphic button to display a series of
bitmaps.  The display of the bitmaps is performed in a circular fashion with
the first bitmap displayed, then the next until the last bitmap afterwhich
first bitmap is displayed, then the next, etc.  A message, GBM_ANIMATE must be
sent to the button to cause the animation to start and stop whereas the Auto
animation  style can be used in place of this style to cause the animation to
be started and stopped when the button is selected by the user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 716. Help for Auto animation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto animation style is used cause the graphic button to display a series
of bitmaps.  The display of the bitmaps is performed in a circular fashion with
the first bitmap displayed, then the next until the last bitmap afterwhich
first bitmap is displayed, then the next, etc.  When the button is selected by
the user, the action causes the animation to be started and stopped.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 717. Help for Hilite bitmap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 The Hilite bitmap style is used to cause the button to display a different
bitmap when the button is in a highlighted (ie. selected) state.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 718. Help for Disable bitmap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 The Disable bitmap style is used to cause the button to display a different
bitmap when the button is in a disabled (ie. non-selectable) state.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 719. Help for 3D recessed text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3D recessed text style is used to cause the text for the button to be
displayed within a recessed rectangle giving the effect that the text is sunken
within the button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 720. Help for 3D raised text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3D raised text style is used to cause the text for the button to be
displayed within a raised rectangle giving the effect that the text is above
the button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 721. Help for Mid-point tick ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Mid-point tick style cause the mid-point and end point tick marks to be
longer than the other tick marks of the circular slider.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 722. Help for No value buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No value buttons style prevents + and - buttons from being displayed within
the circular slider.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 723. Help for No dial numbers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No dial numbers style prevents scrollable numeric value from being
displayed within the circular slider.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 724. Help for No dial text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No dial text style prevents the window title beneath the dial from being
displayed within the circular slider.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 725. Help for Direct manipulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Direct manipulation style allows the user to select the value from within
the circular slider causes the value to change.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 726. Help for 360┬░ scroll range ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 360┬░ scroll range style causes the scroll range to be exteneded within the
circular slider to be the full dial.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 727. Help for Proportional Ticks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Proportional Ticks style causes the tick marks within the circular slider
to be proportional.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 728. Help for No Ticks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The No ticks style causes the circular slider to have no tick marks.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 729. Help for Circular Value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Circular value style causes the circular slider to have circular value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 730. Help for handwriting border ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Border style causes a border to be drawn around the entry area of the
handwriting control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 731. Help for 3D handwriting border ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3D border style causes a 3D border to be drawn around the entry area of the
handwriting control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 732. Help for sketch border ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Border style causes a border to be drawn around the entry area of the
sketch control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 733. Help for 3D sketch border ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The 3D border style causes a 3D border to be drawn around the entry area of the
sketch control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 734. Help for text type visual ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The visual text type causes a certain piece of text to have no sub-segments.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 735. Help for text type implicit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The implicit text type causes the text to be represented as the orders of the
characters as they are typed on the keyboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 736. Help for window orientation left to right ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The left to right window orientation causes the window to have its orientation
in the bottom left corner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 737. Help for window orientation right to left ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The right to left window orientation causes the window to have its orientation
in the bottom right corner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 738. Help for text orientation left to right ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The left to right text orientation causes the text to be displayed starting
from the left and moving to the right.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 739. Help for text orientation right to left ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The right to left text orientation causes the text to be displayed starting
from the right and moving to the left.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 740. Help for text orientation contextual ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The contextual text orientation causes the text to be displayed either left to
right or right to left based upon the first strong character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 741. Help for numerals nominal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The nominal numerals causes the display of only nominal (i.e. Arabic) numerals.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 742. Help for numerals pass through ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The pass through numerals causes the display as stored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 743. Help for numerals national ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The national numerals causes the display of only national (i.e. Hindi)
numerals.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 744. Help for numerals contextual ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The contextual numerals causes the numerals to be displayed based on the
surronding text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 745. Help for symmetric swapping off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The off symmetric swapping causes the characters such as brackets, braces and
parentheses to not be swapped.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 746. Help for symmetric swapping on ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The off symmetric swapping causes the characters such as brackets, braces and
parentheses to be swapped.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 747. Help for word break off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The off word break determination prevents word recognition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 748. Help for word break on ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The on word break determination allows word recognition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 749. Help for character shape determination display shaped ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The display shaped character shape determination causes the text that is stored
in a nominal/base shape to be automatically shaped upon display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 750. Help for character shape determination save shaped ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The display shaped character shape determination is already shaped and ready
for display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 751. Help for character shape determination nominal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The nominal character shape determination is displayed and stored in its
nominal (base) shapes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 752. Help for character shape determination initial ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The initial character shape determination is already shaped and ready for
display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 753. Help for character shape determination middle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The middle character shape determination is already shaped and ready for
display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 754. Help for character shape determination final ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The final character shape determination is already shaped and ready for
display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 755. Help for character shape determination isolated ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The isolated character shape determination is already shaped and ready for
display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Accelerator Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following accelerator keys are defined for use within Prominare Designer:

 Key:           Function:

 Ctrl+A         File save as.

 Ctrl+C         Edit styles of selected control.

 Ctrl+D         Duplicate control.

 Ctrl+F         Set focus.

 Ctrl+G         Order controls.

 Ctrl+I         Align controls.

 Ctrl+L         Tools windows.

 Ctrl+M         Order menu items.

 Ctrl+N         File new.

 Ctrl+O         File open.

 Ctrl+P         Save window position.

 Ctrl+R         Replace controls.

 Ctrl+S         File save.

 Ctrl+T         Test mode.

 Ctrl+V         Show window/dialogue list.

 Ctrl+W         Edit custom.

 F3             Exit Prominare Designer.

 Del            Delete.

 Shift+Del      Cut.

 Ctrl+Ins       Copy.

 Shift+Ins      Paste.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 756. Help for Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click on one of the following groups to get help for keys that do a
specific task:

     Accelerator keys
     Cursor movement keys
     Eiiting keys
     Text selection keys
     Action bar keys
     Menu keys
     Dialogue keys
     System keys.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Action bar keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to select the System icon and action bar items.

 Key:           Function:

 F10            Switches between the action bar and the design area.

 Shift+Esc      Switches between the System icon and the design area.

 Right          Highlights the next action bar item or the System icon.

 Left           Highlights the previous action bar item or the System icon.

 Enter          Accesses the pull-down of the highlighted action bar item or
                System icon.

 Mnemonic       The mnemonic key is the key corresponding with the underlined
                letter in the action bar items.  It accesses the pull-down of
                the action bar item containing the mnemonic.

 Escape         Returns to the design area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Menu keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to select pull-down items.

 Key:           Function:

 Up             Moves up one pull-down item.

 Down           Moves down one pull-down item.

 Enter          Selects the highlighted pull-down item.

 Mnemonic       The mnemonic key is the key corresponding with the underlined
                letter in the pull-down items.  It selects the pull-down item
                containing the mnemonic.

 Escape         Closes the pull-down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Dialogue keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to select dialogue box items.

 Key:          Function:

 Tab           Moves to the next control group on the dialogue.

 Shift+Tab     Moves to the previous control group on the dialogue.

 Right         Moves to the next button on the dialogue.

 Left          Moves to the previous button on the dialogue.

 Up            Moves up one item in a selection box.

 Down          Moves down one item in a selection box.

 Page Up       Scrolls up one page in a selection box with scroll bars.

 Page Down     Scrolls down one page in a selection box with scroll bars.

 Spacebar      Switches a check box on and off.

 Enter         Starts the activity for the selected pushbutton.

 Escape        Exits the dialogue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for System keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to switch between, move, and size Presentation Manager windows.

 Key:                Function:

 Alt+Tab             Switches to the next Presentation Manager window.

 Alt+Shift+Tab       Switches to the previous Presentation Manager window.

 Alt+Esc             Switches to the next application (including
                     non-Presentation Manager applications).

 Ctrl+Esc            Switches to the Task List.

 Alt+F4              Closes the active window.

 Alt+F5              Restores the active window.

 Alt+F7              Moves the active window.

 Alt+F8              Sizes the active window.

 Alt+F9              Minimizes the active window.

 Alt+F10             Maximizes the active window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 757. Help for Clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Clipboard holds the window or dialogue that you Cut or Copy.

The Clipboard can only hold one block of window or dialogue at a time.  When
you Cut or Copy window or dialogue, any window or dialogue that is already in
the Clipboard is replaced.

When you use Paste window or dialogue, the window or dialogue in the Clipboard
is inserted into the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Cursor movement keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to move the cursor in an entry field.

 Key:          Function:

 Up            Moves the cursor up one line.

 Down          Moves the cursor down one line.

 Right         Moves the cursor right one character.

 Left          Moves the cursor left one character.

 Ctrl+Right    Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.

 Ctrl+Left     Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous word.

 Home          Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.

 End           Moves the cursor to the end of the current line.

 Ctrl+Home     Moves the cursor to the beginning of the first line in the file.

 Ctrl+End      Moves the cursor to the end of the last line in the file.

 Page Up       Scrolls the window or dialogue up one window.

 Page Down     Scrolls the window or dialogue down one window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Editing keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to edit the text in the file.

 Key:              Function:

 Insert            Switches between insert and overtype mode.

                   In insert mode, new text is inserted at the cursor position,
                   moving the existing text to the right.

                   In overtype mode, the new text replaces the existing text.

 Delete            If text is selected, the selected text is deleted.

                   If no text is selected, the character to the right of the
                   cursor is deleted, and any remaining characters to the right
                   of the cursor are shifted left.

 Backspace         If text is selected, the selected text is deleted.

                   If no text is selected, the character to the left of the
                   cursor is deleted, and any remaining characters to the right
                   of the cursor are shifted left.

 Ctrl+Delete       Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the
                   current line.

 Shift+Del         Cuts the selected text out of the file and saves it in the
                   Clipboard.

 Ctrl+Ins          Copies the selected from the file and saves it in the
                   Clipboard.

 Shift+Ins         Pastes the text in the Clipboard into the file at the cursor
                   position.

                   If text is selected, the Clipboard text will replace the
                   selected text.

                   If no text is selected, the Clipboard text is inserted at
                   the cursor position.

 Alt+Backspace     Undoes the last change made


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Help for Text selection keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to select text and extend existing selected areas of text.

CAUTION:
 If an area of text is selected, pressing any character key, the Backspace key,
or the Delete key deletes the selected text from the entry field.

 Key:                Function:

 Shift+arrow         Selects text or extends a selection in the direction of
                     the arrow.

 Shift+Home          Selects text or extends a selection to the beginning of
                     the current line.

 Shift+End           Selects text or extends a selection to the end of the
                     current line.

 Shift+Ctrl+Right    Selects text or extends a selection to the beginning of
                     the next word.

 Shift+Ctrl+Left     Selects text or extends a selection to the beginning of
                     the previous word.

 Shift+Ctrl+Home     Selects text or extends a selection to the beginning of
                     the file.

 Shift+Ctrl+End      Selects text or extends a selection to the end of the
                     file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 758. Help for Product Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Through the Help Support menu items, you can select two additional menu items.
The first one, Submit problem... is used to submit a problem report for one of
the applications you are using within the Prominare Designer.  The second menu
item Submit suggestion... is used to submit a suggestion for the Prominare
Designer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 759. Help for Submit Problem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you are experiencing problems within any of the applications provided with
the Prominare Designer, you can through the Help Support menu item submit a
problem report.  The Support Entry Form displayed provides a notebook in which
you enter information on the problem, the problem application, your machine
description along with your name, address and phone numbers.

The notebook pages provided are:

     Identification
     Product
     System
     Problem

 You can select the device in which the information will be printed on by
 clicking the mouse pointer on the Printer setup... push button which will
 cause the Printer Setup dialogue to be displayed.

 Once you have completed the necessary information within the notebook pages,
 you can click the mouse pointer on the Print/Send push button.  This will
 cause the problem report information to be printed on the printer selected, or
 if you are directly faxing the information from your computer, will have the
 information faxed to the product support for your locale.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 760. Help for Submit Suggestion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When you have a suggestion for any of the applications provided with the
Prominare Designer, you can through the Help Support menu item submit a
suggestion.  The Suggestion Entry Form displayed provides a notebook in which
you enter information on the suggestion, the application along with your name,
address and phone numbers.

The notebook pages provided are:

     Identification
     Product
     Suggestion

 You can select the device in which the information will be printed on by
 clicking the mouse pointer on the Printer setup... push button which will
 cause the Printer Setup dialogue to be displayed.

 Once you have completed the necessary information within the notebook pages,
 you can click the mouse pointer on the Print/Send push button.  This will
 cause the problem report information to be printed on the printer selected, or
 if you are directly faxing the information from your computer, will have the
 information faxed to the product support for your locale.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 761. Help for Entry Form dialogue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The entry form dialogue provides you with a notebook containing pages in which
you enter information before you print out the results or have them sent
through your fax software to Prominare support.  You need to complete each page
of the forms to allow Prominare support personnel to be able to use the
information you have submitted properly.

Please make sure that you complete the first page, Identification, such that if
Prominare support personnel have to contact you for additional information,
they can.  Without this, your problem cannot be solved as quickly as possible.

You can select the device in which the information will be printed on by
clicking the mouse pointer on the Printer setup... push button which will cause
the Printer Setup dialogue to be displayed.

Once you have completed the necessary information within the notebook pages,
you can click the mouse pointer on the Print/Send push button.  This will cause
the problem report information to be printed on the printer selected, or if you
are directly faxing the information from your computer, will have the
information faxed to the product support for your locale.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 762. Help for Identification notebook page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Identification notebook page is used to enter information to identify
yourself including your address and phone numbers.

You can through the Reports drop down select previously submitted reports for
follow up or re-submittion with new information.  The Locale drop down allows
you to select the correct support organization.  The final support report will
have the organization where you should send the information to printed at the
top of the first form.

The Save check box is used to indicate that the report should be saved when the
report is printed or faxed.  You should use this option since it allows you to
follow up problems with additional information as required. The New push button
causes a new report to be created in which you can submit the information for.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 763. Help for Product notebook page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Product notebook page is used to select the product in which you either
wish to make a suggestion for or report a problem on. When you select the
Submit problem... or Submit suggestion... menu item from within one of the
Prominare Designer applications, that application will be automatically
selected.  You can select a different one by clicking the mouse pointer on the
appropriate radio button.  If you selected the Other radio button, please enter
the name of the application within the entry field provided beside it.  It can
accept up to 63 characters.

Below the product radio buttons are the problem areas.  You can select from one
of the following:

      Fatal error
      Recurrent
      Intermittent
      Unknown
 These radio buttons will only be active when you are submitting a problem
 report.

 You can select the font to use for the report from the drop down list labeled
 Fonts and the font size from the drop down list labeled Size. The default font
 used when printing or faxing will depend on the printer or fax device
 selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 764. Help for System info notebook page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The System notebook page is used to enter information on your system. You
should include the brand name, model number or name and manufacturer of your
computer.  You should also include information like the video device, video
memory, video device driver (if possible), hard disk size, number of drives,
network, etc.  This will allow Prominare support personnel to better understand
the constraints and configuration of your system.  The report printout will
provide the amount of memory contained on your system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 765. Help for Problem notebook page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Problem notebook page is used to enter the description of the problem.
Please provide as much detail as possible and attach any code listing that
illustrate the problem.  The multiple-line entry field provided can accept up
to 32 KB of information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 766. Help for Suggestion notebook page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Suggestion notebook page is used to enter the description of the
suggestion.  Please provide as much detail as possible and attach any code
listing that illustrate the suggestion.  The multiple-line entry field provided
can accept up to 32 KB of information.